installation and operation handbook · 2704 controller contents installation and operation...

304
2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK 1. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1.2 1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL....................................................................................... 1.2 1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual ............................................................................... 1.2 1.2. WHAT IS 2704........................................................................................................ 1.3 1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN .......................................................................................... 1.4 1.3.1. Unpacking.............................................................................................................. 1 .4 1.3.2. Contents of Packaging ........................................................................................... 1.4 1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process? ................................................................ 1.4 1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW.......................................................... 1.6 1.4.1. Status Messages ..................................................................................................... 1.7 1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1.8 1.6. I/O MODULES ....................................................................................................... 1.9 2. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 2.2 2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................... 2.2 2.1.1. Positioning............................................................................................................. 2.2 2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704............................................................................ 2.2 2.1.3. Mounting the Controller ........................................................................................ 2.3 2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller........................................................... 2.3 2.2. WIRING .................................................................................................................. 2.4 2.2.1. Electrical Connections ........................................................................................... 2.4 2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout ............................................................................................ 2.4 2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS.............................................................................. 2.6 2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage) ..................................................................... 2.6 2.3.2. Relay Output .......................................................................................................... 2.6 2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections ...................................................................................... 2.7 2.3.4. Analogue Input Connections ................................................................................. 2.8 2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input) ........................................................... 2.9 2.3.6. Digital I/O............................................................................................................ 2.10 2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS ........................................ 2.11 2.4.1. Digital Communications Connections ................................................................. 2.11

Upload: others

Post on 19-Aug-2020

35 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1

MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER

INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK

1. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1.2

1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL....................................................................................... 1.2

1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual ............................................................................... 1.2

1.2. WHAT IS 2704........................................................................................................ 1.3

1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN .......................................................................................... 1.4

1.3.1. Unpacking.............................................................................................................. 1.4

1.3.2. Contents of Packaging ........................................................................................... 1.4

1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?................................................................ 1.4

1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW.......................................................... 1.6

1.4.1. Status Messages..................................................................................................... 1.7

1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1.8

1.6. I/O MODULES ....................................................................................................... 1.9

2. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 2.2

2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................... 2.2

2.1.1. Positioning.............................................................................................................2.2

2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704............................................................................ 2.2

2.1.3. Mounting the Controller ........................................................................................ 2.3

2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller........................................................... 2.3

2.2. WIRING .................................................................................................................. 2.4

2.2.1. Electrical Connections........................................................................................... 2.4

2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout ............................................................................................ 2.4

2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS.............................................................................. 2.6

2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage) ..................................................................... 2.6

2.3.2. Relay Output.......................................................................................................... 2.6

2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections...................................................................................... 2.7

2.3.4. Analogue Input Connections ................................................................................. 2.8

2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input) ........................................................... 2.9

2.3.6. Digital I/O............................................................................................................ 2.10

2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS ........................................ 2.11

2.4.1. Digital Communications Connections ................................................................. 2.11

Page 2: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.4.2. I/O Modules......................................................................................................... 2.13

2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE................................... 2.18

2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening .................................................................................... 2.19

3. CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 3.2

3.1. POWER UP............................................................................................................. 3.3

3.1.1. The HOME Page ................................................................................................... 3.3

3.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS .............................................................................. 3.4

3.3. THE PROG BUTTON............................................................................................ 3.5

3.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON ........................................................................... 3.5

3.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON......................................................................... 3.6

3.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto) .................................................... 3.7

3.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual) ....................................... 3.7

3.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM ............................................. 3.8

3.6.1. Pages...................................................................................................................... 3.8

3.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW................................................................................. 3.9

3.7.1. To Select a Page Header ........................................................................................ 3.9

3.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header. ................................................ 3.10

3.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the List................................................................. 3.11

3.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List.................................................................. 3.11

3.8. BACKSCROLL .................................................................................................... 3.11

3.9. PARAMETER VALUES ..................................................................................... 3.12

3.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism .................................................................................... 3.13

3.9.2. Invalid key actions............................................................................................... 3.13

3.10. PARAMETER TABLES.................................................................................... 3.14

3.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE .............................. 3.15

3.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY ............................. 3.18

4. CHAPTER 4 ACCESS LEVELS.................................................................................. 4.2

4.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS................................................................. 4.2

4.2. PASSCODES........................................................................................................... 4.2

4.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVEL ...................................................................... 4.3

Page 3: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-3

5. CHAPTER 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE ....................................................................... 5.2

5.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE ..................................................................... 5.2

5.1.1. To Select The Summary Page................................................................................ 5.2

6. CHAPTER 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATION........................................................... 6.2

6.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names............................................................................. 6.2

6.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?........................................................ 6.3

6.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS ................................. 6.4

6.3.1. Run ........................................................................................................................ 6.4

6.3.2. Hold....................................................................................................................... 6.4

6.3.3. Reset ...................................................................................................................... 6.4

6.3.4. Servo...................................................................................................................... 6.4

6.3.5. Hot Start ................................................................................................................ 6.4

6.3.6. Power Fail Recovery.............................................................................................. 6.5

6.3.7. Wait ....................................................................................................................... 6.6

6.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak)................................................................................. 6.7

6.3.9. Digital Inputs......................................................................................................... 6.8

6.3.10. Program User Values........................................................................................... 6.8

6.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES...................................................................................... 6.9

6.4.1. Time To Target Programmer ................................................................................. 6.9

6.4.2.Ramp Rate Programmer.......................................................................................... 6.9

6.4.3. Segment Types....................................................................................................... 6.9

6.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES.................................................................................... 6.11

6.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen.................................................................. 6.11

6.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen .................................... 6.12

6.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM..................................................... 6.13

6.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button .................................................................................... 6.13

6.6.2. From Digital Inputs ............................................................................................. 6.13

6.6.3. From Digital Communications ............................................................................ 6.13

6.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page ....................................................... 6.14

6.6.5. Run Parameter Tables.......................................................................................... 6.15

6.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM.............................................................. 6.17

6.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages ...................................................................... 6.17

6.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) Parameters ................................................... 6.18

Page 4: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program ............................................................... 6.20

6.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters............................................................ 6.21

6.8. EXAMPLES.......................................................................................................... 6.24

6.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate Programmer................................................ 6.24

6.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer.......................................... 6.28

6.8.3. To Apply Holdback ............................................................................................. 6.29

6.8.4. To Apply Wait ..................................................................................................... 6.31

6.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run Mode.................................................................. 6.32

6.8.6. To Set Up Program Names .................................................................................. 6.33

6.8.7. To Set Up Segment Names .................................................................................. 6.34

6A. CHAPTER 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER ............................................................ 6.2

6A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER? ................................................. 6.2

6A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer ........................................................................ 6.3

6A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page .................................................................................. 6.4

6A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List ......................................... 6.5

6A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page................................................................................ 6.6

6A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY .............................................................................. 6.6

Page 5: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-5

7. CHAPTER 7 ALARM OPERATION .......................................................................... 7.2

7.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS ....................................................... 7.2

7.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names............................................................................. 7.2

7.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER........................................ 7.3

7.2.1. Full Scale High ...................................................................................................... 7.3

7.2.2. Full Scale Low....................................................................................................... 7.3

7.2.3. Deviation High Alarm ........................................................................................... 7.4

7.2.4. Deviation Low Alarm ............................................................................................ 7.4

7.2.5. Deviation Band...................................................................................................... 7.5

7.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction)......................................................... 7.6

7.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction) .......................................................... 7.6

7.3. BLOCKING ALARMS.......................................................................................... 7.7

7.3.1. Full Scale Low With Blocking .............................................................................. 7.7

7.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking................................................................... 7.7

7.3.3. Deviation Band With Blocking.............................................................................. 7.8

7.4. LATCHING ALARMS .......................................................................................... 7.9

7.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic Reset....................................... 7.9

7.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset ......................................... 7.10

7.4.3. Grouped Alarms................................................................................................... 7.10

7.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED................................................................... 7.11

7.5.1. Alarm Delay Time ............................................................................................... 7.11

7.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE ..................................................................... 7.12

7.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters ............................................................................ 7.13

7.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.................................................................... 7.15

7.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm ...................................................................... 7.16

7.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS ................................... 7.17

7.9. ALARM PARAMETERS .................................................................................... 7.18

7.9.1. ALARMS (LP1 Page) Parameters ....................................................................... 7.18

7.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters ............................................................... 7.19

7.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters................................................................ 7.20

7.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters .............................................................. 7.21

7.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters ................................................................... 7.22

Page 6: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8. CHAPTER 8 TUNING ..................................................................................................... 2

8.1. WHAT IS TUNING................................................................................................... 2

8.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING ........................................................................................... 3

8.2.1. One-shot Tuning....................................................................................................... 3

8.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1.................................................................. 4

8.3.1. AutotuneParameters.................................................................................................. 6

8.3.2. To View the State of Autotune ................................................................................. 7

8.4. MANUAL TUNING .................................................................................................. 8

8.4.1. Setting the cutback values......................................................................................... 9

8.4.2. Integral action and manual reset ............................................................................. 10

8.4.3. To Manually Set PID Values.................................................................................. 10

8.4.4. Valve Position Control ........................................................................................... 10

8.5. CASCADE TUNING ............................................................................................... 10

8.5.1. Manual Tuning ....................................................................................................... 10

8.5.2. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop .................................................................... 10

8.6. GAIN SCHEDULING ............................................................................................. 11

8.6.1. To Use Gain Scheduling......................................................................................... 11

8.6.2. Analogue Value ...................................................................................................... 12

9. CHAPTER 9 LOOP SET UP........................................................................................ 9.2

9.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP...................................................................................... 9.2

9.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS......................................................................... 9.3

9.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters ..................................... 9.4

9.2.2. PID Page................................................................................................................9.5

9.2.3. PID (Aux) Page ..................................................................................................... 9.6

9.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS .......................................................... 9.7

9.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page................................................................................... 9.8

9.4. CASCADE CONTROL.......................................................................................... 9.9

9.4.1. Overview ............................................................................................................... 9.9

9.4.2. Simple Cascade...................................................................................................... 9.9

9.4.3. Cascade with Feedforward..................................................................................... 9.9

9.4.4. Auto/Manual Operation......................................................................................... 9.9

9.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page) ............................................. 9.10

9.5. RATIO CONTROL .............................................................................................. 9.11

Page 7: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-7

9.5.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 9.11

9.5.2. Basic Ratio Control ............................................................................................. 9.11

9.5.3. Setpoint Tracking ................................................................................................ 9.12

9.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page) ......................................... 9.12

9.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL...................................................................................... 9.13

9.6.1. Introduction: ........................................................................................................ 9.13

9.6.2. Simple Override................................................................................................... 9.13

9.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page) ............................... 9.14

9.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS......................................... 9.15

9.7.1. Motor Parameters ................................................................................................ 9.15

9.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller ................................................. 9.16

9.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS................................................................................... 9.17

9.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE) ................................................................. 9.19

10. CHAPTER 10 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS ................................................. 10.2

10.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL ........................................ 10.3

10.1.1. Temperature Control.......................................................................................... 10.3

10.1.2. Carbon Potential Control................................................................................... 10.3

10.1.3. Sooting Alarm.................................................................................................... 10.3

10.1.4. Automatic Probe Cleaning................................................................................. 10.3

10.1.5. Enriching Gas Correction .................................................................................. 10.3

10.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring .............................................. 10.4

10.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS................................. 10.4

10.2.1. Zirconia Parameters........................................................................................... 10.6

10.3. HUMIDITYCONTROL..................................................................................... 10.8

10.3.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 10.8

10.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring .......................................................... 10.9

10.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber..................................... 10.10

10.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber.......................................... 10.10

10.1010.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS..................... 10.11

10.4.1. Humidity Parameters ....................................................................................... 10.12

Page 8: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11. CHAPTER 11 INPUT OPERATORS ...................................................................... 11.2

11.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS ................................................................. 11.2

11.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION............................................................................ 11.3

11.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1 ......................................................................... 11.4

11.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters.............................................. 11.6

11.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities.......................................................... 11.7

11.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING ........................................ 11.8

11.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points ..................................... 11.9

11.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters......................................................... 11.10

11.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR) ......................................... 11.11

11.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters................................................................. 11.11

11.5. BCD INPUT ...................................................................................................... 11.12

12. CHAPTER 12 TOTALISER, TIMER, CLOCK, COUNTER OPERATION....... 12.2

12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS? ...................................................................... 12.2

12.2. TIMER TYPES................................................................................................... 12.4

12.2.1. On Pulse Timer Mode........................................................................................ 12.4

12.2.2. Off Delay Timer Mode ...................................................................................... 12.5

12.2.3. One Shot Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 12.6

12.2.4. Minimum On Timer Mode................................................................................. 12.7

12.3. TIMER BLOCKS............................................................................................... 12.8

12.3.1. Timer Parameters............................................................................................... 12.8

12.4. THE CLOCK ...................................................................................................... 12.9

12.5. TIME BASED ALARMS................................................................................. 12.10

12.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters.................................................................................. 12.11

12.6. TOTALISERS................................................................................................... 12.12

12.6.1. Totaliser Parameters ........................................................................................ 12.13

Page 9: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-9

13. CHAPTER 13 PATTERN GENERATOR, USER VALUES AND USERMESSAGES........................................................................................................................ 13.2

13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR? ................................................... 13.2

13.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator ...................................................................... 13.2

13.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?.......................................................................... 13.4

13.2.1. To Adjust User Values...................................................................................... 13..4

13.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES?.................................................................... 13.5

13.3.1. To Inspect User Messages ................................................................................. 13.5

14. CHAPTER 14 ANALOGUE OPERATORS............................................................ 14.2

14.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?..................................................... 14.2

14.1.1. Analogue Operations ......................................................................................... 14.3

14.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATOR PARAMETERS....... 14.4

15. CHAPTER 15 LOGIC OPERATORS ..................................................................... 15.2

15.1.1. Logic Operations ............................................................................................... 15.2

15.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERS .......................................... 15.3

16. CHAPTER 16 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS ................................................... 16.2

16.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS?................................................. 16.2

16.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION................ 16.3

16.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS........................................................... 16.4

Page 10: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17. CHAPTER 17 STANDARD IO ................................................................................ 17.2

17.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO? .............................................................................. 17.2

17.2. PV INPUT ........................................................................................................... 17.3

17.2.1. To Scale the PV Input........................................................................................ 17.3

17.2.2. Offset .................................................................................................................17.3

17.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter Time............................................................. 17.5

17.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters...................................................................... 17.6

17.3. ANALOGUE INPUT.......................................................................................... 17.7

17.3.1. To Scale the Analogue Input ............................................................................. 17.7

17.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters ........................................................... 17.7

17.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS ........................................... 17.8

17.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT ................................................... 17.8

17.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters .................................................................. 17.10

17.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS.................................................. 17.11

17.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters.................................................. 17.11

17.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS ............................. 17.12

Page 11: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-11

18. CHAPTER 18 MODULE IO..................................................................................... 18.2

18.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO? .................................................................................. 18.2

18.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 18.3

18.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS.......................................................................... 18.4

18.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission.................................................................. 18.5

18.3.2. Relay Output...................................................................................................... 18.6

18.3.3. Triac Output....................................................................................................... 18.7

18.3.4. Triple Logic Output ........................................................................................... 18.8

18.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input ............................................................... 18.8

18.3.6. PV Input ............................................................................................................ 18.9

18.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply ............................................................................... 18.10

18.3.8. Transducer Power Supply................................................................................ 18.10

18.3.9. Potentiometer Input ......................................................................................... 18.11

18.3.10. DC Input ........................................................................................................ 18.12

18.3.11. Dual PV Input................................................................................................ 18.13

18.4. MODULE SCALING ....................................................................................... 18.15

18.4.1. The PV Input ................................................................................................... 18.15

18.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:-.................................................................................. 18.16

18.4.3. Output modules ............................................................................................... 18.18

18.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:-............................................................................ 18.19

18.4.5. Retransmission Output .................................................................................... 18.20

18.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:- ............................................................... 18.20

18.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input............................................................... 18.21

Page 12: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

19. CHAPTER 19 TRANSDUCER SCALING.............................................................. 19.2

19.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING? ........................................................... 19.2

19.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION................................................................................... 19.3

19.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer ................................................ 19.4

19.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION.......................................................................... 19.5

19.3.1. To Calibrate a Load Cell.................................................................................... 19.7

19.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION ..................................................................... 19.8

19.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference ..................................... 19.9

19.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION....................................................................... 19.11

19.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare Feature ......................................................................... 19.11

19.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS................................................. 19.13

19.6.1. Parameter Notes............................................................................................... 19.14

20. CHAPTER 20 DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................ 20.2

20.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS? .............................................................................. 20.2

20.1.1. Diagnostics parameters ...................................................................................... 20.2

A. APPENDIX A ORDER CODE.................................................................................... A.2

A. HARDWARE CODE............................................................................................... A.2

B. QUICK START CODE ........................................................................................... A.3

Page 13: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-13

B. APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION............................................. B.2

B.1. SAFETY................................................................................................................. B.2

B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................................. B.2

B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR ..................................................................................... B.2

B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautions ...................................................................... B.2

B.2.2. Cleaning............................................................................................................... B.2

B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS................................................ B.3

B.3.1. Safety Symbols.................................................................................................... .B.3

B.3.2. Personnel.............................................................................................................. B.3

B.3.3. Enclosure of live parts.......................................................................................... B.3

B.3.4. Isolation ...............................................................................................................B.3

B.3.5. Wiring ..................................................................................................................B.4

B.3.6. Power Isolation .................................................................................................... B.4

B.3.7. Earth leakage current ........................................................................................... B.4

B.3.8. Overcurrent protection ......................................................................................... B.5

B.3.9. Voltage rating ...................................................................................................... B.5

B.3.10. Conductive pollution.......................................................................................... B.5

B.3.11. Over-temperature protection .............................................................................. B.6

B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shield....................................................... B.6

B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC............................................. B.6

B.4.1. Routing of wires................................................................................................... B.6

C. APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION...................................................... C.2

C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS.................................................... C.2

C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE.................................................................. C.3

C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE.................................................................... C.3

C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT............................................................................................ C.4

C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE ......................................................................... C.4

C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................. C.5

C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES............................................................................. C.5

C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES......................................................................... C.5

C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES................................................................... C.5

C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU ........................................................................................ C.5

Page 14: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU .......................................................................................... C.6

C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT ............................................................................. C.6

C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS ..................................................................... C.6

C.14. ALARMS............................................................................................................. C.6

C.15. USER MESSAGES............................................................................................. C.6

C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. C.6

C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER........................................................................... C.7

C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................... C.7

C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION .......................................................................... C.7

C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS......................................... C.8

C.20.1. mV Input ............................................................................................................ C.8

C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input ....................................................................... C.9

C.20.3. High Level Input .............................................................................................. C.10

C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type................................................................................. C.11

C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type ................................................................................. C.13

Page 15: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-15

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1-1: General View of 2704 Controller...................................................................... 1.3

Figure 1-2: General View of 2704 Controller...................................................................... 1.5

Figure 1-3: Operator Interface ............................................................................................. 1.6

Figure 1-4: Rear Terminals .................................................................................................. 1.8

Figure 1-5: View of the Plug-in Modules ............................................................................ 1.9

Figure 2-1: Outline Dimensions............................................................................................. 2.2

Figure 2-2: Panel Cut-out and Minimum Spacing Requirements........................................... 2.3

Figure 2-3: Rear Terminal Connections ................................................................................ 2.5

Figure 2-4: Wiring Connections For Line Voltage.................................................................. 2.6

Figure 2-5: Wiring Connections For Fixed Relay Output ....................................................... 2.6

Figure 2-6: Wiring Connections For PV Input........................................................................ 2.7

Figure 2-7: Wiring Connections For Analogue Input.............................................................. 2.8

Figure 2-8: Wiring Connections for the I/O Expander............................................................ 2.9

Figure 2-9: Wiring Connections for Digital I/O..................................................................... 2.10

Figure 2-10: RS232 Communications Connections............................................................. 2.11

Figure 2-11: RS485 2- Wire Communications Connections ................................................ 2.11

Figure 2-12: RS485 4-Wire Communications Connections ................................................. 2.12

Figure 2-13: Profibus Wiring Connections........................................................................... 2.12

Figure 2-14: Wiring Connections for IO Modules ................................................................ 2.17

Figure 2-15: Wiring Connections for Zirconia Probe............................................................ 2.18

Figure 3-1: The 'HOME' Page (default) ............................................................................... 3.4

Figure 3-2: Operator Buttons ............................................................................................... 3.5

Figure 3-3: Loop Summary and Loop Trend Chart.............................................................. 3.6

Figure 3-4: Changing Setpoint............................................................................................. 3.8

Figure 3-5: Changing Output Power.................................................................................... 3.8

Figure 3-6: Page Types ........................................................................................................ 3.9

Figure 3-7: Changing Parameter Values for Different Parameter Types............................ 3.14

Figure 3-8: Cascade Loop View ........................................................................................ 3.16

Figure 3-9: Override Loop View........................................................................................ 3.17

Page 16: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Figure 3-10: Ratio Loop View........................................................................................... 3.18

Figure 3-11: Navigation Diagram………………………… ……………………………3-21

Figure 6-1: A Setpoint Program........................................................................................... 6.3

Figure 6-2: Wait Events ....................................................................................................... 6.6

Figure 6-3: An Example of a Program with Repeating Section ......................................... 6.10

Figure 6A-1: An Example of a Programmed Digital Output............................................. 6A.2

Figure 9-1: Cascade with Feedforward .............................................................................. 9.10

Figure 9-2: Simple Ratio Control Block Diagram ............................................................. 9.11

Figure 9-3: Simple Override Control ................................................................................. 9.13

Figure 10-1: An Example of 2704 Wiring for Carbon Potential Control........................... 10.4

Figure 10-2: Humidity Control Block................................................................................ 10.8

Figure 10-3: Example of Humidity Controller Connections .............................................. 10.9

Figure 11-1: Linearisation Example................................................................................... 11.3

Figure 11-2: Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities ...................................................... 11.7

Figure 11-3: Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching .......................................................... 11.8

Figure 12-1: On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions ....................................... 12.4

Figure 12-2: Off Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions ...................................... 12.5

Figure 12-3: One Shot Timer ............................................................................................. 12.6

Figure 12-4: Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions ................................ 12.7

Figure 14-1: Analogue Operators....................................................................................... 14.2

Figure 15-1: Logic Operators............................................................................................. 15.2

Figure 17-1: Input Scaling (Standard IO) .......................................................................... 17.3

Page 17: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Contents

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-17

Figure 18-1: Input Scaling (Modules).............................................................................. 18.15

Figure 18-2: Time Proportioning Relay, Triac or Logic Output ...................................... 18.18

Figure 18-3: Scaling a Retransmission Output ................................................................ 18.20

Figure 19-1: Strain Gauge Calibration............................................................................... 19.3

Figure 19-2: Load Cell Calibration.................................................................................... 19.6

Figure 19-3: Comparison Calibration ................................................................................ 19.8

Figure 19-4: Effect of Auto-Tare ..................................................................................... 19.12

Figure B-1: Analogue Input and Fixed Digital I/O Equivalent Circuit ................................ B.4

Figure C-1: Error Graph - mV Input ................................................................................... C.8

Figure C-2: Error Graph - 0 - 2V Input............................................................................... C.9

Figure C-3: Error Graph - 0 - 10V Input........................................................................... C.10

Figure C-4: Error Graph - RTD Input ............................................................................... C.12

Figure C-5: Overall CJT Error at Different Ambient Temperatures.................................. C.13

Page 18: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Contents 2704 Controller

a-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 19: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Introduction

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-1

1. Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................... 2

1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL......................................................................2

1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual ..................................................................... 2

1.2. WHAT IS 2704 ....................................................................................3

1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN........................................................................4

1.3.1. Unpacking ................................................................................................... 4

1.3.2. Contents of Packaging ................................................................................ 4

1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?..................................................... 4

1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW............................................6

1.4.1. Status Messages......................................................................................... 7

1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW ...........................................................8

1.6. I/O MODULES ....................................................................................9

Page 20: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Introduction 2704 Controller

1-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

1. Chapter 1 INTRODUCTIONThank you for selecting the 2704 High Performance Programmer/Controller. This chapterprovides a general overview of your controller to help you to become more familiar with itsuse, and to ensure that it is the correct type for your process.

1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is intended for those who wish to install, operate or commission the controller.Operation of the controller is provided by three levels of security access. This manual,therefore, is confined to these levels.

The three levels of access are:-

Level 1 Operation only. This level allows, for example, parameters to be changedwithin safe limits or programmers to be run, held or reset.

Level 2 Supervisory level. This level allows, for example, parameter limits to be pre-set or programs to be edited or created.

Level 3 Commissioning level. This level is intended for use when commissioning theinstrument. It allows, for example, calibration offsets to be adjusted to matchtransducer and transmitter characteristics.

ViewConfig

It is possible also to read the configuration of the controller at any level but theconfiguration cannot be changed.

Configuration of the controller is available in a fourth level of access. This is explained in aseparate engineering manual, available on request by quoting Part Number HA026933.

1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual

This chapter provides a general overview of the controller

Chapter 2 describes how to mount and wire the controller.

Chapter 3 explains the principle of operation

The remaining chapters explain the operation of individual features of the controller. Thesechapters follow the order in which the features appear in the pull out navigation diagram inchapter 2.In each chapter the purpose of the feature is described, followed by its operation, and, whereapplicable, includes worked examples of how to set up specific aspects of a feature.

Page 21: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Introduction

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-3

1.2. WHAT IS 2704

The 2704 is a high accuracy, high stability temperature and process controller which isavailable in a single, dual or three loop format. It has a 120 x 160 pixel electroluminescentused to show all process information. The user interface is menu driven via the display andseven front panel keys.

When the 2704 is configured as a programmer itprovides advanced programming facilities such as:• storage of up to 50 programs.• up to three variables can be profiled in each

program, or one profile can be assigned to run inmore than one loop.

• up to sixteen event outputs can be assigned toeach program.

Special machine controllers can be created byconnecting analogue and digital parameters to thecontrol loops, either directly or by using a selectionof mathematical and logical functions.

Figure 1-1: General View of 2704 Controller

Other features include:

• A wide variety of inputs which can be configured, including thermocouples, Pt100resistance thermometers and high level process inputs.

• Direct connection of zirconia oxygen probes is also supported for use in heat treatmentfurnaces and ceramic kiln applications.

• Each loop can be defined to be PID, On/Off or motorised valve position and can controlusing a variety of strategies including single, cascade, override and ratio control.

• PID control outputs can be relay, logic, triac or dc with motorised valve position outputsbeing relay triac or logic.

• Auto tuning and PID gain scheduling are available to simplify commissioning andoptimise the process

Configuration of the controller is explained in a separate Engineering Manual, Part No.HA026933. Configuration is achieved either via the front panel operator interface or byusing ‘iTools’ - a configuration package which runs under the Windows 95, or NT operatingsystems.

Page 22: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Introduction 2704 Controller

1-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN

1.3.1. UnpackingAll parts comprising the 2704 are boxed individually. The packaging is designed towithstand reasonable transit shocks. It is suggested that each item is unpacked carefully andthe contents inspected for damage.

If there is evidence of shipping damage, please notify your supplier within 72 hours. Thepackaging should be retained for inspection.

All packaging contains anti-static materials to prevent the build up of static which candamage electronic assemblies.

1.3.2. Contents of PackagingEach box contains the following parts:-

1. The 2704 controller fitted into its corresponding sleeve. Labels on the sleeve identify thecontroller code, its serial number, and the customer reference number. These detailsshould be checked against your requirements before installing the unit into the panel. Adescription of the instrument code is given in Appendix A.

2. Two panel retaining clips3. Burden resistors for use with mA inputs4. This Installation and Operation Handbook

Please refer to Figure 1-2 showing a general view of the controller.

1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?Every controller is supplied with a specific hardware configuration to match the processwhich it is designed to control. For example, there are five ‘slots’ which can contain differentplug in modules. These are defined by a hardware code as shown in Appendix A. Beforeinstalling the 2704 controller check the label on the side of the instrument against theinstrument coding given in Appendix A for correct type.

Where possible the controller is supplied with its software configured to match the process.This is defined by a quick start order code given in Appendix A. This should also be checkedon the instrument label to ensure that the controller is suitable for the process to becontrolled.The 2704 controller contains a large number of variants to fulfil the demands of specificprocesses. In general the software configuration can be changed through the front panel ofthe controller. The procedures are described both in this manual and the EngineeringManual, Part No. HA026933. Alternatively, ‘iTools’ configuration software may be used toconfigure the controller. The order code for this is also shown in Appendix A.

Page 23: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Introduction

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-5

Figure 1-2: General View of 2704 Controller

➆➇

➂➇

➁➃

KEY

➀ Display screen

➁ Latching ears

➂ Panel sealing gasket

➃ Panel retaining clips

➄ Label

➅ Sleeve

➆ Terminal covers

➇ Ratchets

Page 24: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Introduction 2704 Controller

1-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW

The front panel of the 2704 consists of a 120 x 160 pixel electroluminscent display, andseven operator push-buttons. See Figure 1-3.

• The display is used to show the process conditions.

• The seven operator buttons allow adjustments to be made to the controller.

Page button Press to select a new list of parameters.

Scroll button Press to select a new parameter in a list.

Down button Press to decrease a parameter value.

Up button Press to increase a parameter value.

Figure 1-3: Operator Interface

SP

Operator buttons

Alarm Beacon(appears at the

left of the bannerwhen an alarm is

present)

Auto/Manual

SetpointSource

Programmer/Autotune status

Loop Type

PV

Units or [SBY]

Output level

This is a view ofLoop 1 Page

Page 25: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Introduction

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-7

1.4.1. Status MessagesMessages appear on the display to show the current status of the controller. Table 1-1 belowdescribes these messages:-

LP1, LP2,LP3

Indicates which loop is being viewed

AUT The selected loop is in automatic (closed loop) control

MAN The selected loop is in manual (open loop) control

SP1, SP2,PO, REM

Indicates where the SP is derived, i.e. Setpoint 1, Setpoint 2, Programmer,Remote

CSD Indicates that the loop is in cascade.

OVR Indicates that the loop is in override.

RAT Indicates that the loop is in ratio (Ratio must be enabled from the parameterlist at the bottom of the display)

Indicates a program is activated

Indicates a program is held at its current levels

Indicates a program is in reset condition i.e. not running

When an alarm occurs an alarm symbol flashes in the header banner. Whenthe alarm is acknowledged but is still active the symbol will be permanently lit.When the alarm is acknowledged but is no longer active the symbol willdisappear.

See Chapter 7 ‘Alarm Operation’ for further details.

[UNITS] The process units are displayed in the right hand side of the banner

[SBY] This symbol will flash in the right hand side of the banner in place of ‘units’when the controller is in standby mode. In this state all interfaces to the plantare switched to a rest condition. For example, all control outputs = 0.

When this symbol is on the controller is no longer controlling theprocess.

This symbol will be on when:-

• The controller is in configuration mode

• Standby mode has been selected through the user interface or via anexternal digital input

• During the first few seconds after start up

Table 1-1: Status Messages

Page 26: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Introduction 2704 Controller

1-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW

The 2704 controller must be mounted and wired in accordance with the instructions given inChapter 2.

The controller is intended to be mounted through a cut out in the front panel of an electricalcontrol cabinet. It is retained in position using the panel mounting clips supplied.

All wires are connected to terminals at the rear of the instrument. Each block of six terminalsis protected by a hinged cover which clicks into closed position.

Figure 1-4: Rear Terminals

Hingedcover inopenposition

N

L

BB

BA

BC

2D

2B

2A

2C

1D

1B

1A

1C

MODULE1

MODULE3

HF

HD

HE

JF

JD

JE

D8

E2

E1

AC

AA

AB

HB

HA

HC

JB

JA

JC

D5

D4

D3

D1

DC

D2

D7

D6

V-

VI

VH

V+

MODULE4

MODULE5

MODULE6

PowerSupply

DigitalInput

Relay

Analogueinput0-10V

6D

6C

6B

6A

5D

5C

5B

5A

4D

4C

4B

4A

PVinput

I/OExpanderor Digitalinput

DigitalI/O

3B

3A

3C

3D

COMMS

MODULEH

COMMS

MODULEJ

Analogueinputscreen

The functionality of the two outer rows of terminals iscommon to all instrument variants, as follows:-

PV input VH, VI, V+, V-Analogue input BA, BBI/O expander E1, E2Fixed changeover relay AA, AB, ACDigital I/O channels D1 to D8 and DCPower supply L, N, Earth

* Terminals 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D must not be wired to.

*

*

*

*

Page 27: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Introduction

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-9

1.6. I/O MODULES

The 2704 controller has the facility to fit optional plug in modules. The connections for thesemodules are made to the inner three connector blocks as shown in Figure 1-4The modules are:• Communications modules. See also section 2.4• I/O modules See also section 2.5

These modules are fitted simply by sliding them into the relevant position as shown in Figure1-5.

Figure 1-5: View of the Plug-in Modules

Page 28: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Introduction 2704 Controller

1-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 29: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-1

2. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ............................................. 2

2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION.........................................................2

2.1.1. Positioning................................................................................................... 2

2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704 .................................................................. 2

2.1.3. Mounting the Controller ............................................................................... 3

2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller.................................................. 3

2.2. WIRING...............................................................................................4

2.2.1. Electrical Connections................................................................................. 4

2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout.................................................................................. 4

2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS ............................................................6

2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage) ............................................................ 6

2.3.2. Relay Output ............................................................................................... 6

2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections ........................................................................... 7

2.3.4. Analogue Input Connections ....................................................................... 8

2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input) .................................................... 9

2.3.6. Digital I/O................................................................................................... 10

2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS ...........................11

2.4.1. Digital Communications Connections........................................................ 11

2.4.2. I/O Modules ............................................................................................... 13

2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE ......................18

2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening.......................................................................... 19

Page 30: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-2 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2. Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

2.1.1. PositioningThe controller can be mounted vertically or on a sloping panel of maximum thickness 15mm(0.6in). Adequate access space must be available at the rear of the instrument panel forwiring and servicing purposes. The outline dimensions are shown in figure 2-1.Take care not to cover ventilation holes in the top, bottom and sides of the instrument.

Before proceeding please read Appendix B ‘Safety and EMC Information’.

2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704

Figure 2-1: Outline Dimensions

FrontPanelHeight96mm(3.78in)

Overall depth behindpanel 150mm(5.91in)Front panel

width 96mm(3.78in)

Panel thickness upto 12mm, 0.5in.

Page 31: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-3

2.1.3. Mounting the Controller

1. Prepare the panel cut-out to the size shown in Figure 2-2. Ensure that there is sufficientspacing between instruments as shown by the minimum dimensions given in Figure 2-2.Ensure also that the controller is not mounted close to any device which is likely toproduce a significant amount of heat which may affect the performance of the controller.

2. Insert the controller through the panel cut-out.

3. Spring the upper and lower panel retaining clips into place. Secure the controller inposition by holding it level and pushing both retaining clips forward.

Note:- If the retaining clips subsequently need removing, in order to extract the controllerfrom the control panel, they can be unhooked from the side with either your fingers or ascrewdriver.

Figure 2-2: Panel Cut-out and Minimum Spacing Requirements

2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the ControllerIf required, the controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching earsoutwards and pulling the controller forward out of the sleeve. When plugging the controllerback into its sleeve, ensure that the latching ears click into place.

It is recommended that the power to the controller is switched off when un-plugging orplugging the controller into its sleeve. This is to prevent premature wear on the controllerconnectors when current is flowing through them.

Panel cut-out

92 x 92 mm

3.62 x 3.62 in

-0+0.8

-0+0.03

Recommendedminimumspacing ofcontrollers

38mm(1.5in)

10mm(0.4in)

(Not toscale)

Page 32: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-4 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.2. WIRING

WARNINGYou must ensure that the controller is correctly configured for your application.Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled, and/orpersonal injury. It is your responsibility, as the installer, to ensure that theconfiguration is correct. The controller may either have been configured when ordered,or may need configuring now. See 2704 Engineering Manual Part Number HA026933 fordetails.

Before proceeding further, please read Appendix B, Safety and EMC information.

2.2.1. Electrical Connections

All electrical connections are made to the screw terminals at the rear of the controller. Theyaccept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 22 AWG) and should be tightened to a torque of0.4Nm (3.5lbin). If you wish to use crimp connectors, the correct size is AMP part number349262-1. The terminals are protected by a clear plastic hinged cover to prevent hands, ormetal, making accidental contact with live wires.

2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout

The rear terminal layout is shown in Figure 2-3, which identifies terminal designations andtheir functions. Refer to the individual diagrams to wire the controller to your requirements.

The two outer terminal strips have fixed hardware for all versions of the instrument, asfollows:-

• A Process Variable input which can be configured for:-• Thermocouple, RTD, Pyrometer, Voltage (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-

20mA) signals

• Seven Digital I/O, configurable as input or output.• Inputs are logic (-1 to 35Vdc) or contact closure, and can be configured for:-

Manual, Remote, Run, Hold, Reset, etc,.• Outputs are open collector requiring an external power supply, and can be

configured as event, status time proportioning or valve position outputs.• One digital input• An I/O expander which allows additional digital I/O via an external unit.

• A changeover relay which can be configured as an alarm or event output. It cannot beconfigured as a time proportioning output.

• An analogue input for volts (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-20mA) signals to a secondPID loop, setpoint, etc,. (This input can be characterised to match a particular curve froma transmitter. It cannot accept thermocouple inputs directly).

• Power supply to the unit. The supply may be 85 - 264Vac 50 or 60 Hz,

The three central terminal strips are for optional plug in modules, as follows:-

Page 33: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-5

• Terminals marked 2A to 2D are reserved for a Memory Module only. No connectionsshould be made to these terminals.

• Terminals marked HA to HF are connections for optional RS232, RS485, or RS422communications modules.

• Terminals marked JA to JF are connections for an optional slave communications moduleor second communications port used to communicate with other instruments.

The modules fitted into the above two communications slots can be inter-changed.

For a full list of available modules refer to the Ordering code - Appendix A and the TechnicalSpecification - Appendix C. The functionality of these modules is given in subsequentchapters.

Caution, (refer to the accompanying documents)

Functional earth (ground) terminal!

Figure 2-3: Rear Terminal Connections

N

L

BB

BA

BC

2D

2B

2A

2C

1D

1B

1A

1C

MODULE1

MODULE3

HF

HD

HE

JF

JD

JE

D8

E2

E1

AC

AA

AB

HB

HA

HC

JB

JA

JC

D5

D4

D3

D1

DC

D2

D7

D6

V-

V1

VH

V+

MODULE4

MODULE5

MODULE6

PowerSupply

DigitalInput

Relay

Analogueinput HiLevel eg0-10V

6D

6C

6B

6A

5D

5C

5B

5A

4D

4C

4B

4A

PVinput

I/OExpanderor Digitalinput

DigitalI/O

3B

3A

3C

3D

COMMS

MODULEH

COMMS

MODULEJ

Remoteinputscreen

Warning:- Take care that mains supplies are connected only to the power supplyterminals (85 to 254Vac only), the fixed relay terminals or to relay or triacmodules. Under no circumstances should mains supplies be connected to anyother terminals.

Page 34: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-6 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS

2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage)The 2704 controller is suitable for connection to a power supply of between 85 and 264Vac50 or 60 Hz. It is the users responsibility to provide an external fuse or circuit breaker.Suitable fuses are T type (EN60127 time-lag type) rated at 1A

Figure 2-4: Wiring Connections For Line Voltage

2.3.2. Relay OutputA single changeover relay is provided as standard. It can be configured as a control output oran alarm or event output.

Figure 2-5: Wiring Connections For Fixed Relay Output

Line 85 to 264Vac

Neutral

Earth

L

N

85 to 264Vac Voltage Supply

Fixed relay connections

AC

AA

AB

NormallyOpen

NormallyClosed

Common

Page 35: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-7

2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections

The fixed PV input can accept a range of sensors including Thermocouple, RTD (Pt100),Pyrometer, Voltage (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-20mA) signals. These sensors areused to provide inputs to Control Loop 1.

Figure 2-6: Wiring Connections For PV Input

VH

VI

V-

V+

Thermocouple or Pyrometer

Use the correct type ofcompensating cableto extend wiring

+

-

VH

VI

V-

V+

Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V

+

-

0 - 10Volt

source

VH

VI

V-

V+

mV (up to 80mV)

+

-

mVoltsource

VH

VI

V-

V+

Current 0 to 20mA (4 to 20mA)

+

-

2.49Ωresistorsupplied

Currentsource

VH

VI

V-

V+

RTD (Pt100)

3-wireplatinumresistancethermometer

For 2-wirethis is alocal link

Page 36: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-8 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.3.4. Analogue Input ConnectionsThe analogue input is supplied as standard and is intended to accept 0 to 10 Vdc from avoltage source. A milli-amp current source can be used by connecting a 100Ω resistor acrossterminals BA and BB. This input can be used as a remote setpoint input, remote setpoint trimor as a high level PV input to a control loop. This input is not isolated from the digital IO.

Figure 2-7: Wiring Connections For Analogue Input

Isolated Voltage Source (0 to 10V)

Non-isolated Voltage Source (0 to 10V)

Non-isolated0 to10Vdcsource

Screen

BC

BA

BB

100Ω

If screened cable isused earth at the supplyend

Non-isolated Current Source (0 - 20mA) (4 - 20mA)

Non-isolatedcurrentsource

BC

BA

BB

If screened cable isused earth at the supplyend

Isolated0 to10Vdcsource

BC

BA

BB

100Ω

Isolated Current Source (0 - 20mA) (4 - 20mA)

Isolatedcurrentsource

BC

BA

BB

Screen

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

Page 37: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-9

2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input)The I/O expander is used with the 2704 to allow the number of I/O points to be increased bya further 20 digital inputs and 20 digital outputs. Data transfer is performed serially via a twowire interface from instrument to expander.If the expander unit is not required it is possible to use terminals E1 & E2 as a secondarydigital input. These terminals are not part of the digital I/O on terminals D1 to D8 and if usedin this way connect a 2K2, ¼ W limiting resistor in series with the input, as shown in Figure2-8.

Figure 2-8: Wiring Connections for the I/O Expander

I/O expander connections

E1

E2

20 Inputs

20 Outputs

Expander

Datatransfer

I/O expander connections

E1

E2

+

-

Additional digital input if theexpander is not used

2K2Limits:

-1V, +35V

Page 38: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-10 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.3.6. Digital I/OEight digital I/O connections are provided as standard. They can be configured as:1. Inputs Run, Hold, Reset, Auto/Manual, etc, - logic or contact closure.2. Outputs Configurable as Control outputs, Programmer Events, Alarms, etc.Digital IO is not isolated from instrument ground.

Figure 2-9: Wiring Connections for Digital I/O

Digital Outputs (Relay, Thyristor or SSR Drive in any combination)

D5

D7

D6

D1

DC

D2

D4

D3

Outputs areopen collector

_+

Relay

Relay

Relay

ThyristorUnit

ThyristorUnit

SSR

SSR

External power supply 10 to 35 Vdc.Each output is current limited to 40mA

Digital Inputs (Logic Inputs or Contact Closure in any combination)

D5

D7

D6

D1

DC

D2

D4

D3 D8This terminal can beused for DigitalInput only (not DO)

Common

Common

Logicinputs (1)

Contactclosureinputs

Note 1:Logic inputs can accept drive signals froma voltage source where:<2V = Active (1) Limit -1V>4V = Inactive (0) Limit +35VThis action is reversed if the input hasbeen configured as ‘Inverted’

Page 39: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-11

2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS

2.4.1. Digital Communications ConnectionsDigital Communications modules can be fitted in two positions in the 2704 controller, (seealso section 1.5). The connections being available on HA to HF and JA to JF depending onthe position in which the module is fitted. The two positions could be used, for example, tocommunicate with ‘iTools’ configuration package on one position, and to a PC running asupervisory package on the second position.

The connections shown in the following diagrams show RS232, 2-wire RS485, 4-wire RS422and master/slave comms to a second controller.

The diagrams show connections for ‘bench top test’ wiring. For a full description of theinstallation of a communications link, including line resistors, see CommunicationsHandbook, Part No. HA026230, and EMC Installation Guide, part no. HA025464.

Figure 2-10: RS232 Communications Connections

Figure 2-11: RS485 2- Wire Communications Connections

RS232

HF

HB

HA

HC

HE

HD Common

Com

Rx

PC

Tx

TxRx

RS285 - 2 wire

HF

HB

HA

HC

HE

HD Common

A(+)

B(-)

RS232 toRS4852-wire

converter

TxRx

PC

Com

RxARxB TxB

TxACom

Connections ‘daisychained’ to other

instruments

Page 40: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-12 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Figure 2-12: RS485 4-Wire Communications Connections

Figure 2-13: Profibus Wiring Connections

RS485 4-wire(or RS422)

HF

HB

HA

HC

HE

HD Common

A(Tx+)

B (Tx-)

TxRx

PC

Com

A’ (Rx+)

B’ (Rx-)RS232 to

RS422/RS4854-wire

converterRxB

RxA TxBTxACom

Connections ‘daisychained’ to other

instruments

Profibus

TxRx

PC

Com

HF

HB

HA

HC

HE

HD Rx/Tx +ve

Rx/Tx -ve

Dig Grnd

Shield

VP (+5V)

RS232 toRS422/RS485

4-wireconverter

RxBRxA TxA

TxBCom

Connections ‘daisychained’ to other

instruments

HF

HB

HA

HC

HE

HD

Shield

390Ω

390Ω

220Ω

Last controller onlyrequires terminating

resistors

Rx/Tx +ve

Rx/Tx -ve

Dig Grnd

VP (+5V)

Twisted pairs

Page 41: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-13

2.4.2. I/O ModulesThe 2704 controller contains five positions in which 4-terminal I/O modules can be fitted.These positions are marked Module 1, Module 3, Module 4, Module 5, Module 6, in Figure2-3. Module 2 is reserved for the Memory Module which can only be fitted in this position.To find out which modules are fitted check the ordering code which is found on a label on theside of the instrument.Any module, listed in this section, can be fitted in any position, except the PV input which islimited to positions 3 and 6 only. Care should be taken, therefore, to ensure that modules arefitted as expected from the order code. The instrument can be interrogated in ‘View Config’level to locate the positions in which the modules are fitted. See Chapter 4, Access Levels. Ifmodules have been added, removed or changed it is recommended that this is recorded on theinstrument code label.

I/O Module Typicalusage

H/WCode

Connections and examples of use

Note: The order code and terminal number is pre-fixed by the module number.

Module 1 is connected to terminals 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D; module 3 to 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, etc.

Relay (2 pin)andDual Relay

2A, 264Vacmax1mA 1V min

Heating,cooling,alarm,programevent,valve raise,valve lower

R2andRR

Change OverRelay

(2A, 264Vacmax)

Heating,cooling,alarm,programevent, valveraise, valvelower

R4

Triple LogicOutput

(18Vdc at8mA max.)

Heating,cooling,programevents

TP A

B

D

C +

___

+

+

+Output A

Output B

Output C

Common

SSR orthyristorunit

+

-

A

B

D

C

Voltagesupply

ContactorRelay

Panel lampetc

ContactorRelay

Panel lampetc

First relay

Second relay(dual relay only)

A

B

D

CVoltagesupply

ContactorRelay

Panel lampetc

Page 42: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-14 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

I/O Module Typicalusage

H/WCode

Connections and examples of use

Triacand DualTriac

(0.7A, 30 to264Vaccombinedrating)

Heating,cooling,valve raise,valve lower

T2andTT

Note: Dual relay modules may be used in placeof dual triac.

Note:-The combined current rating for the twotriacs must not exceed 0.7A.

DC Control

(10Vdc, 20mAmax)

Heating,cooling

e.g. to a4-20mAprocessactuator

D4

DC Re-transmission

(10Vdc, 20mAmax)

Logging ofPV, SP,outputpower, etc.,

(0 to 10Vdc,or0 to 20mA)

D6

A

B

D

C

Actuator0-20mA

or0-10Vdc -

+

A

B

D

C

To othercontrollers0-20mA

or0-10Vdc

-

+

A

B

D

C

Voltagesupply

Motorisedvalve

Raise

Lower Second triac

First triac

Page 43: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-15

I/O Module Typicalusage

OrderCode

Connections and examples of use

PV Input(Modules3 & 6 only)

and

AnalogueInput(Modules1, 3, 4 & 6only)

Second orthird PVinput

mV, V, mA,TC,RTD (Pt100)Zirconiaprobe

Second orthird PVinput

mV, mA,TC,RTD (Pt100)

PV

AM

Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V

A

B

D

C

+

-

0 - 10Volt

source

mV (up to 80mV)

A

B

D

C

+

-

mVoltsource

For 2-wire thisis a local link

A

B

D

C

Thermocouple

-

+

A

B

D

C

3-wire RTD

Current 0 to 20mA (4 to 20mA)

A

B

D

C

+

-

2.49Ωresistorsupplied

Currentsource

Page 44: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-16 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

I/O Module Typicalusage

OrderCode

Connections and examples of use

Triple LogicInput

Events

e.g. ProgramRun, Reset,Hold

TL

TripleContactInput

Events

e.g. ProgramRun, Reset,Hold

TK

24VTransmitterSupply

(20mA)

To power anexternaltransmitter

MS A

B

D

C

+

-Transmitter

A

B

D

C

Common

Input 1

Input 3

Input 2

Logic inputs

<5V OFF>10.8V ONLimits:-3V, +30V

A

B

D

C

Common

ExternalSwitches or

Relays

Input 1

Input 3

Input 2

Contactinputs<100* ON>28K* OFF

Page 45: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-17

TransducerPowerSupply

Provide 5Vor 10Vdc topower StrainGaugeTransducer

G3orG5

Note: To minimise noise pick up it isrecommended that screened cables are used forstrain guage power supply connections.

Potentio-meter Input

(100Ω to15KΩ)

Motorisedvalvepositionfeedback

Remote SP

VU

Dual PVInput(Modules 3& 6 only)

To accepttwo inputsfrom a highlevel and alow levelsource.The twoinputs arenot isolatedfrom eachother.

DP

The common connections to terminal D must bereturned separately to D as shown in the dualcurrent example above.

Figure 2-14: Wiring Connections for IO Modules

A

B

D

C

_

+

AB

D

C

ToFixedorModulePVInput

External calibrationresistor (may be fittedin transducer).

A

B

D0v

C

+0.5v

Wiper

A

B

D

C

+

-

Currentsource

0-2Vinput

Currentsource

0-20mAinput

100Ω

2.49Ω

+

-

Page 46: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-18 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE

A dual signal probe, such as a Zirconia probe, will normally be connected to a Dual PV Inputmodule (Code DP). The module presents two channels, A and C, where A is the voltageinput and C is the mV, thermocouple, RTD or mA input.

Example 1 shown below uses the Dual PV Input module with both channels configured. Inthis configuration the module runs at 4.5Hz. The two channels are un-isolated from one-another but isolated from the rest of the instrument.

Example 2 uses two modules. The modules can either be two PV Input modules (code PV)or a Dual PV Input module (code DP) with Channel C configured as ‘None’ plus a PV Inputmodule. This combination runs at 9Hz and may be used if the loop is unusually fast.

I/O Module Typicalusage

OrderCode

Connections and examples of use

Dual PVInput

Zirconiaprobe

DP Example 1:- Using the Dual PV Input Module.Channel C is shown configured for thermocouple.The temperature sensor of a zirconia probe isconnected to this input, terminals C & D. TheVolt Source is connected to the A channel,terminals A & D.

Two PVInputModules

PV Example 2:- Using Two ModulesThe temperature sensor of the zirconia probe canbe connected to the precision PV input of one I/Omodule, connections C & D, with the Volt Sourceconnected to the second module, terminals A &D.

For further information see Chapter 10.Figure 2-15: Wiring Connections for Zirconia Probe

A

B+

-

ZirconiaVolt

source

D

C+

-

C

D

A

B

D

C

+

-Zirconia

Voltsource +

-

Note: The +ve of the voltsource must be connected tothe-ve of the thermocouple.

Page 47: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Installation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-19

2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening

2.5.1.1. Zirconia Carbon Probe Construction

2.5.1.2. Screening connections when two modules are used

The zirconia sensor wires should be screened and connected to the outer shell of the probe ifit is situated in an area of high interference.

2.5.1.3. Screening connections when a dual input module is used

Both the thermocouple and the zirconia sensor wires must be screened and connected to theouter shell of the probe if it is situated in an area of high interference.Note the reverse connection of the zirconia sensor .

D

D

C

B

A

B

A

Outer Electrode

Inner Electrode

Screen

Zirc. mV

T.C.

-

+

-

+

C

-

+

-

+

Screened Cable

Outer Electrode

Inner Electrode

Screen

Zirc. mV

T.C.

-

+

D

C

B

A-+

-

+

-

+

Screened Cable

Screened Compensating Cable

Outer Electrode

Inner ElectrodeCeramic Insulator

ZirconiaSensor

Hot End

Screen

Zirc. mV

Thermocouple

-+

-+

Outer metallic shell of the probe

Page 48: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation 2704 Controller

2-20 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 49: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-1

3. CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED ...................................... 23.1. POWER UP ..................................................................................................33.1.1. The HOME Page.........................................................................................33.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS....................................................................43.3. THE PROG BUTTON.................................................................................53.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON.................................................................53.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON..............................................................63.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto) ..........................................73.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual) .............................73.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM ..................................83.6.1. Pages ...........................................................................................................83.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW......................................................................93.7.1. To Select a Page Header .............................................................................93.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header. .....................................103.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the List ......................................................113.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List .......................................................113.8. BACKSCROLL..........................................................................................113.9. PARAMETER VALUES...........................................................................123.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism..........................................................................133.9.2. Invalid key actions ....................................................................................133.10. PARAMETER TABLES .........................................................................143.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE....................153.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY...................183.13. NAVIGATION DIAGRAM ……………………………………………….19

Page 50: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3. Chapter 3 GETTING STARTEDWith the controller installed, as described in the previous chapter, this chapter explains theprinciple of how to locate and change values of parameters using the front panel buttons.

Operation of these buttons changes the information on the display by opening different pages.Each page is associated with a particular aspect of the operation of the controller. Thenavigation between the pages follows a set order and the principle of this navigation isdescribed in this chapter.

Subsequent chapters describe the detail of each page and follow the order in which the pagesappear on the controller.

Note: The 2704 controller is an application specific controller and can be configured tothe preferences of a particular process, site or user. This means that the displays shownin this and following chapters may not be identical to those shown in your instrument.Where the text on a display is user configurable it is shown in italics, eg Loop1

About this chapter

This chapter describes:

◊ How to change setpoint

◊ The operator buttons

◊ Parameters and how to access them

◊ Pages

◊ How to step through pages

◊ How to step through parameters

◊ How to change parameter values

◊ The navigation diagram

◊ Parameter tables

Page 51: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-3

3.1. POWER UP

Install and wire up the controller in accordance with Chapter 2 and switch on. A short selftest sequence takes place during which the controller identification is displayed together withthe version number of software fitted.

3.1.1. The HOME PageThe controller then shows a default display, referred to as the HOME page. It is possible toconfigure the HOME page to suit the preferences of the process or the user, but the format isshown in Figure 3-1. This is also the default display on a new controller.

The HOME page will be displayed under the following conditions:-1. When the controller is switched on2. When the access mode is changed from configuration level to an operating level

3. When and are pressed together (see 3.10)4. When a timeout (if configured) occurs

The HOME page can be configured as:-1. Summary Page (see also Chapter 5)2. The Program Run page (see also Chapter 6)3. Loop Views - LP1 (as shown), LP2, LP34. The Access page (see Chapter 4)5. Cycle Each Loop. LP1 to LP3 pages are cycled in turn6. All Loops (summary of 2 or 3 loops if configured)7. LP1, LP2, LP3 Trend Charts (PV & SP for each loop)8. Program Mimic

The configuration of these displays is described in the Engineering manual, Part No.HA026933.

Figure 3-1: The 'HOME' Page (default)

OutputPVSP

Message Banner

ProgrammerStatus

Auto/Manual

Setpoint source

Loop 1

Loop 2

Loop 3

Page 52: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS

Auto/Manualbutton

When pressed, this toggles between automatic andmanual mode:• If the controller is in automatic mode ‘AUT’ is displayed• If the controller is in manual mode, ‘MAN’ is displayed

See Figure 3-1

Loop selectbutton

Each press selects each loop in turn or between eachloop and the trend chart if each of the above options areconfigured plus a summary of all loops.The loop name is shown in the banner at the top of thedisplay

Programmerbutton

This buttonoperates theprogrammeron all loops

See alsoChapter 6

‘ProgrammerOperation’

• Press once to display a pop up window

The pop up window will remain for approximately 6seconds and during this period:-

• Press PROG again to RUN a program

• Press PROG again to HOLD a program

• Press PROG again to toggle between RUN & HOLD

• Press PROG and hold for two seconds to reset

Page button Press to select new pages from the page header ‘Menu’.If held down it will continuously scroll the pages.

Scroll button Press to select a new parameter from the page heading.If held down it will continuously scroll through theparameters.

Down button Press to decrease an analogue value, or to change thestate of a digital value

Up button Press to increase an analogue value, or to change thestate of a digital value

Note:- The AUTO, LOOP, or PROG may have been disabled in configuration level.

Figure 3-2: Operator Buttons

AUTO

LOOP

PROG

AUTO LOOP PROG

Page 53: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-5

3.3. THE PROG BUTTON

If the controller is configured as a programmer this button has three functions:

• To put the programmer into RUN mode. This causes the working setpoint to follow theprofile set in the program being used.

• To put the programmer into HOLD mode. This stops the program from running andmaintains the setpoint at the current level..

• To put the programmer into RESET mode. This resets the programmer to the controllersetpoint, the working setpoint can be changed manually using the Raise/Lower buttons.

This button operates all programmer setpoints simultaneously.

3.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON

If more than one loop is configured, the Loop Select button allows you to select a summaryof each loop from whatever page is being displayed at the time. Each press of the LoopSelect button will change the display from the ‘ALL LOOPS’ view to ‘Loop 1’ summary tothe ‘Loop 1 Trend’ chart, followed by the next loop summary, and so on.

By default a loop is designated by the mnemonic ‘LP’ followed by the loop number (1, 2 or3). This is shown in the banner at the top of the display page. The default message may bereplaced by a customised name for the loop.

To return to the original page view at any time, press the page button, . Alternatively, atimeout may have been set which will return the display to the HOME page view after a setperiod. The timeout is set in configuration level, see Engineering Manual part no HA026933.

If only one loop is configured the display toggles between ‘LP1’ and ‘LP1 Trend’, (the ‘ALLLOOPS’ page is not shown).

Figure 3-3: Loop Summary and Loop Trend Chart

PressLOOP

Next LoopSummary

PressLOOP

Back to ALLLOOPS summary

Page 54: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON

The controller has two basic modes of operation:

• Automatic Mode in which the control output is automatically adjusted to maintain theprocess value at the setpoint .

• Manual Mode in which you can adjust the output independently of the setpoint.

The Auto/Manual button can only be operated from the loop view. Press the Loop Selectbutton to select the loop view, then press AUTO/MAN to toggle between auto and manual.When the controller is in AUTO , ‘AUT’ will be displayed on the page (see Figure 3-4). Themiddle readout will default to the Working Setpoint in a standard controller.

When the controller is in MANUAL , ‘MAN’ will be displayed on the page (see Figure 3-5).The middle readout will default to Output Power in a standard controller.

If the loop summary page is not being viewed when the AUTO/MAN button is pressed, thedisplay will change to the first available loop summary. Subsequent presses will changebetween Auto and Manual for the selected loop as above.

If the output is configured as On/Off, the output will be Off when the target output < 0.9 andOn when the target output is > +1.0.

Page 55: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-7

3.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto)

Figure 3-4: Changing Setpoint

3.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual)

Figure 3-5: Changing Output Power

Press and hold the

button toincrease the setpoint

Press and hold the

button todecrease the setpoint

A flashing bar underlines theselected parameter (setpoint)

Press and hold the

button toincrease the output

Press and hold the

button todecrease the output

A flashing bar underlines the selectedparameter (output power)

Page 56: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM

Parameters are settings, within the controller, which determine how the controller will

operate. They are accessed, using the and buttons, and can be changed, to suit the

process, using the and buttons.Selected parameters may be protected under different security access levels.

Examples of parameters are:-Values - such as setpoints, alarm trip levels, high and low limits, etc.,orStates - such as auto/manual, on/off, etc. These are often referred to as enumerated values.

3.6.1. PagesThe parameters are organised into different pages. A page shows information such as pageheaders, parameter names and parameter values.

Parameters are grouped in accordance with the function they perform. Each group is given a‘Page Header’ which is a generic description of the parameter group. Examples are ‘TheAlarm Page’, ‘The Programmer Page’, etc,. A complete list of these is shown in the fullnavigation diagram, Section 3.13.

Where a function has many parameters associated with it, the Page Header may be further subdivided into ‘Sub-Headers’. The parameters are then found under this category.

Figure 3-6: Page TypesIt is possible to configure different start up pages as the Home page, but the principle ofnavigation is the same for all pages.

Note:-A page only appears on the controller if the function has been ordered and has beenenabled in Configuration mode. For example, if a programmer is not configured theRUN page and the EDIT PROGRAM pages will not be displayed.

Parameters

Sub- Header

Page HeaderPress tomove to a ‘lower’level

Press toreturn to a‘higher’ level

Page 57: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-9

3.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW

3.7.1. To Select a Page Header

Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee

Additional Notes

The vertical bar on the rightof the display indicates theposition of the page header.

When the vertical barreaches the centre of thescreen the text moves up.

This feature allows you tosee previous andfollowing page headernames.

When the last name inthe Page Header listappears at the bottom ofthe display, the verticalbar and the highlightedtext will continue movedownwards.

The sequence is repeatedfollowing further presses of

button

2. Press to scrolldown the list of pageheaders.

3. Press to scrollback up the list ofpage headers.

1. From any display

press as manytimes as necessary toaccess the pageheader menu

Page 58: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header.

Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee

Additional Notes

3. Press to selectthe list of Page Sub-Headers for thehighlighted Page Header.

4. Press or toscroll up or down the listof page sub-headers

5. Press to select thelist of Parameters in thehighlighted sub-header.

6. Press or toscroll up or down the list ofparameters.

7. Press to selectthe parameter which youwish to change

8. Press or tochange the value

1. From any page press

as many times asnecessary to select thelist of Page Headers

2. Press or toscroll up or down the listof page headers.

The symbol indicatesthat the page header isfollowed by a list of sub-headers.

If a page does notcontain a Sub-Headerthe display goes directlyto 5 below

A flashing bar underlinesthe selected parameter.

The parameter can onlybe altered if the value ispreceded by !!

If the value is read only itwill be replaced by ‘- -‘for as long as the raise orlower buttons arepressed

Press to return to Page Header

Press to return to Sub- Header

Press to return

Page 59: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-11

3.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the ListThis sections describes how to select further parameters in the list which you may wish toalter or to view.

Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee

Additional Notes

3.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List

As stated above you can keep pressing or hold down the button to continuously scrollaround the list of parameters. There are two other alternatives. The first is to return to thehighlight bar, described below. The second is ‘Backscroll’ described in the next section.

Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee

Additional Notes

3.8. BACKSCROLL

In some cases it may be more convenient to scroll back up the list, for example, to select anew segment number when setting up a program.

A short cut is provided by holding down and pressing or .

Each press of will step back to the previous parameter. Each press of will stepforward to the next parameter.

This function is provided as a short cut and is not necessary to navigate through theparameters.

The button will allowyou to scroll down the list.

If this button is held downit will continuously scrollaround the list, which willenable you to change aprevious parameter.

1. From the previous

display, press toselect the next parameterwhich you wish tochange

2. Press or tochange the value

1. From the previous

display, press tohighlight the parametervalue and its name.

2. Press or toscroll up or down the list.

Page 60: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.9. PARAMETER VALUES

Parameter values can be displayed in different ways depending upon the parameter type. Thedifferent types of parameter, and how their values are changed, are shown below.

1. Numerical Values (eg Full Scale High Alarm Setpoint)

2. Enumerated Values (eg PV Input Alarm Acknowledge)

3. Digital Values (e.g. programmer event outputs)

4. Parameter Addresses (eg PV Src )

Note:- This example is only available in configuration level, but is included here to illustratethe principle of operation.

Press to increase the value

Press to decrease the value

FS Hi Setpoint !200

Press to show next state

Press to show previous state

PV Alm Ack !No

Press to step along the values. A cursor underthe selected value flashes.

Press or to turn the value on or off

Prog Reset DO ! æ

Press or to change the parameter address byscrolling through a list of the most popular mnemonics.A cursor under the parameter mnemonic flashes.

Press or to change the Parameter address .A cursor under the parameter address flashes.

The parameter name for that address (if it exists) isshown to the right of the Modbus address.

Press to change from parameter address to parameter mnemonic

PV Src !05108:PVIn.Val

PV Src !05108:PVIn.Val

Page 61: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-13

5. Text (eg Program Name - User definable)

6. Time (eg Programmer Segment Duration)

Figure 3-7: Changing Parameter Values for Different Parameter Types

3.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism

Having changed a value, when the or key is released, the display will blink after aperiod of 1.5 seconds, indicating that the new parameter value has been accepted. If anyother key is pressed during the 1.5 second period the parameter value is acceptedimmediately.

There are exceptions for specific parameters. Examples of these are:-

Output Power adjustment when in Manual mode. The value is written continuously as thevalue is changed.

Alarm Acknowledge. If the Alarm Acknowledge is changed from ‘No’ to ‘Acknowledge’ a

confirmation message appears. Press key to confirm the change. If no key is pressed for10 seconds the value is restored to its previous value.

3.9.2. Invalid key actionsAt any time some state transitions may be invalid, due, for example, to contention with digitalinputs or to the current operating state of the instrument.Examples are:-1. Digital inputs have priority over the operator buttons.

2. If a parameter value cannot be changed the ! prompt is not shown

3. If the or button is pressed for a read only parameter a number of dashes, ----, isdisplayed.

Press or to increase or decrease the time setting.This is an accelerating display.

Seg Duration !0:01:00

Program Name !Program 1 Press or to change the character

Press to change to the next character

Program Name !Program 1 Press or to change the character. Up to 16characters can be altered.

Page 62: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.10. PARAMETER TABLES

Subsequent chapters in this manual refer to parameter tables. These tables provide the fulllist of parameters available at Access Level 3 in a particular page. The table below is anexample.

Column 1 gives the name of the parameter as it appears on the display.Column 2 is a description and possible usage of the parameterColumn 3 is the range of values which can be set. . This may be a numerical value, eg -n

to +n, or the condition (enumeration) of a parameter, eg the parameter ‘ProgramStatus’ has enumerations ‘Run’, ‘Hold’, ‘Reset’.

Column 4 is the default value (if applicable) of the parameter set during manufactureColumn 5 is the access level required to change the parameter value.

L1 means that the value is only shown in Level 1L2 means that the value is only shown in Level 1 and Level 2L3 means that the value is always available in the instrument operating mode(i.e. not Configuration Level)R/O is Read OnlyAccess Levels are described in Chapter 4.For Configuration Level access see 2704 Engineering Manual, Part Number HA026933

Table Number: Description of the page PageHeader

1

Parameter Name

2

Parameter Description

3

Value

4

Default

5

AccessLevel

Program Number The number of the selected program L3

Segment Number The currently running segmentnumber

L3

PSP1 Type Program Setpoint 1 type L3

PSP1 Working SP Program Setpoint 1 working setpoint L3

PSP1 Target Program Setpoint 1 target setpoint L3

PSP1 Dwell Time Program Setpoint 1 dwell time L3

This is a continuous loop which returns to the list header

Note:-A parameter only appears if it is relevant to the configuration of the controller. Forexample, a programmer configured as Time to Target will not display the Rateparameter.

Page 63: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-15

3.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE

The Loop Summary, displayed in previous views in this chapter, shows a controllerconfigured as ‘Single’ loop. The Loop Summary view, for controllers configured as cascade,ratio, override or valve position varies as shown in this section.For more information on these methods of control see Chapter 9.

Figure 3-8: Cascade Loop View

Master PV

Master SP

Slave PVSlave SP

This line may show different parameters

Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:

Target Setpoint The main SP Press

Target OP Output demand

VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)

or

Local SP Local (Slave) setpoint

Disable CSD Allows cascade to be turned offeg for commissioning purposes

to adjustthe value.

Note:

1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP is displayedfirst; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP is displayedfirst.

2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.

Target Output Power

Page 64: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Figure 3-9: Override Loop View

Main PV

Main SP

Override PVOverride SP

This line may show different parameters

Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:

Target SP The main setpoint Press

Target OP Output demand

VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)

OvrSP Override setpoint . or

Disable OVR Allows override to be turned offeg for commissioning purposes

Active Loop Displays the active loop - Mainor Override

Main OP Reads the output demand forthe main loop

to adjust

Override OP Reads the output demand forthe override loop

thevalue

Note:

1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP isdisplayed first; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP isdisplayed first.

2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.

Working Output Power (from the active loop)

Page 65: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-17

Figure 3-10: Ratio Loop View

Measured ratioRatio SP

Main Loop PV

Main Loop SP

This line may show different parameters

Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:

Target SP The main setpoint Press

Target OP Output demand

VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)

. or

Ratio SP Ratio setpoint

Enable Ratio Allows ratio to be turned on egfor commissioning purposes

to adjust

Ratio Trim Applies a trim to the ratio SP thevalue

Lead PV The measured flow 1

Note:

1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP isdisplayed first; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP isdisplayed first.

2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.

Working Output Demand

Page 66: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

3.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY

A parameter which appears on a page is described as available. Parameters are not availableif they are not appropriate for a particular configuration or instrument status. For example,relative cool gain does not appear in a heat only controller, and integral time does not appearin an On/Off controller.

A parameter described as alterable is preceded by the ! symbol which indicates that its valuecan be changed. A parameter which is not alterable may be viewed (subject to availability),but may be changed by an instrument algorithm.

A parameter is alterable only if the following conditions are satisfied:-

• The parameter is READ/WRITE• The parameter does not conflict with the status of the instrument. For example, the

proportional band will not be alterable if autotune is active• The instrument keys must be enabled. Keys can be disabled by a logic input, turned off

in configuration level or via digital communications. A logic input can be configured todisable front panel keys; this will not remove remote control of the user interface viadigital communications.

The Navigation Diagram which follows shows all pages which are available at Level 3. For aparticular configuration not all pages are displayed on the controller. For example:-the programmer pages do not appear if a programmer is not configured; the Loop 2 and 3 setup pages do not appear for a single loop controller.

Any one or all of the pages shown in the navigation diagram can also be displayed at Level 1& 2. This, however, will have been pre-set in Configuration Level (see 2704 EngineeringManual Part No HA026933).

Page 67: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Getting Started

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-19

Page 68: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

3-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

3.12 NAVIGATION DIAGRAM

PROGRAM RUN

Selectusing

or

Parameters forAccess

See Chapter 4

Parameters forProgram RunSee Chapter 6

PROGRAM MIMIC

GeneralPSP1PSP2PSP3

PROGRAM EDIT

Parameters forProgram Edit

See Chapter 6

OptionsWiringProgramSegment

INSTRUMENT

Parameters forInstrument

See Eng. ManualHA026933

OptionsUnitsDisplayPage PromUser TextSummaryStandby

SUMMARY

Selectusing

or

Selectusing

or

Parameters forSummary

See Chapter 5

Go ToHumidity

Notes:

1. Page headers shown shaded are only available in Config and View Config level 2. Text shown in italics is user configurable in configuration mode and may be

different from that shown

ALARMS

Parameters forAlarms

See Chapter 7

SummaryLP1 (to 3)PV InputAN InputModule 1 (to 6)User 1 (to 8)

Selectusing

or

AUTOTUNE

Parameters forAutotune

See Chapter 8

LP 1 SETUP

Parameters forLP 1 Setup

See Chapter 9

OptionsWiringSPSP (Aux)CascadeRatioOverridePIDPID (Aux)MotorOutputDiagnosticDisplayDisplay (Aux)Load Sim

Selectusing

or

LP 2 SETUP

Parameters for Loop 2 and Loop 3 Set upSee Chapter 9

LP 3 SETUP

Parameters forDigital ProgramSee Chapter 6A

Dig Prog 1Dig Prog 2Dig Prog 3Dig Prog 4Edit Program

Selectusing

or

DIGITAL PROG

OptionsWiring

Parameters forZirconia ProbeSee Chapter 10

ZIRCONIA PROBE

1000

S01/041372

-200

Page 69: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00 3-21

Figure 3-11: Navigation Diagram

Return to‘Access’

TIMER BLOCKS

Selectusing

or

Parameters forTimer Blocks

See Chapter 12

Timer 1 (to 4)ClockAlarm 1 (&2)Totaliser 1 (to 4)

Parameters forInput OperatorsSee Chapter 11

Cust Lin 1Cust Lin 2Cust Lin 3Switch 1Monitor 1BCD Input

Selectusing

or

INPUT OPERS

Parameters forHumidity

See Chapter 10

HUMIDITY

OptionsWiring

USER VALUES

Parameters forUser Values

See Chapter 13

User Val 1toUser Val 12

ANALOGUE OPERS

Parameters forAnalogue OpersSee Chapter 14

An. 1toAn. 24

Selectusing

or

Selectusing

or

DIAGNOSTICS

Parameters forDiagnostics

See Chapter 20

PATTERN GEN USER MESSAGES

Parameters forPattern Gen

See Chapter 13

Dig Group 1Dig Group 2

Parameters forUser MessagesSee Chapter 13

Msg 1toMsg 8

Selectusing

or

Selectusing

or

COMMS

Selectusing

or

Parameters forCommunicationsSee Chapter 16

H ModuleJ ModuleDiagnostics

STANDARD IO

Selectusing

or

Parameters forStandard IO

See Chapter 17

PV InputAN InputAA RelayDig IO1 (to 7)Diagnostic

MODULE IO

Selectusing

or

Parameters forModule IO

See Chapter 18

IdentsModule 1AModule 1BModule 1C

LOGIC OPERS

Parameters forLogic OperatorsSee Chapter 15

Logic 1toLogic 32

Selectusing

or

IO EXPANDER

Parameters forDIO Expander

See Chapter 20

TXDCR SCALING

Selectusing

or

Parameters forTransducer

ScalingSee Chapter 19

Txdcr1Txdcr2Txdcr3

Press to scroll toprevious headers

Page 70: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Getting Started 2704 Controller

3-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 71: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Access Levels

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 4-1

4. CHAPTER 4 ACCESS LEVELS ......................................... 24.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS ......................................................24.2. PASSCODES................................................................................................24.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVEL ...........................................................3

Page 72: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Access Levels 2704 Controller

4-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

4. Chapter 4 ACCESS LEVELSParameters are protected under five different levels of access for which security codes may benecessary. This chapter describes the different levels of access to the operating parametersavailable in the controller.

4.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS

Access Level What you can do PasswordProtection

Level 1 This is sometimes referred to as Operator Level since it allowsoperators to view and adjust parameters within limits set inhigher levels. Any page available in levels 2 or 3 may beconfigured to appear in level 1. This is done from theconfiguration level using the page promote feature, seeEngineering Manual HA026933

No

Level 2 This is sometimes referred to as Supervisor level since all theparameters relevant to a particular configuration are visible. Allalterable parameters can be adjusted.

Yes

Level 3 These are parameters which are generally required whencommissioning the controller. Any page at this level can alsobe configured to appear at Level 2.

Yes

Config This special level allows access to configure the fundamentalcharacteristics of the controller and is not included in thisoperating handbook.

For configuration details see 2704 Engineering Manual Part noHA026933

Yes

View Config This is a read only level which allows you to view theconfiguration of the controller. It is not possible to changeparameter values in this level. It is not possible to readpasscodes in this level.

Yes

4.2. PASSCODES

On switch on the controller defaults to Level 1 which is not protected by a passcode. Alimited set of parameters can be changed in this level. The parameter tables in each chapterlist those parameters which can be changed.

Level 2, level 3 and Configuration level are protected by passcodes. The default passcodesset in a new controller are:

Level 2 Passcode ‘2’Level 3 Passcode ‘3’View Config Passcode 2704

These passcodes can only be changed in configuration level.See Engineering Manual HA026933.

Page 73: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Access Levels

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 4-3

If a passcode of ‘None’ has been entered for any level it will not be necessary to enter apasscode to enter that level.

The levels of access covered by this manual are Levels 1, 2, 3 and View Config. In any ofthese levels the controller continues to monitor and control the process to which it isconnected. This allows parameter values to be altered to suit the operating conditions of theprocess.Configuration of the controller allows the fundamental characteristics of the controller to bechanged and for this reason it enters a standby state in which all outputs are frozen. In thiscondition the instrument no longer controls the process to which it is connected.

4.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVELDo This This Is The Display You

Should SeeAdditional Notes

This is the page headerwhich contains theaccess levels

3. Press to select theaccess level parameters

The default passcode of anew controller is 3 toenter level 3. If a newpasscode has beenentered in Config levelthis will be in the form 0 to9999.

If an incorrect passcodeis entered, the displayreturns to !0.

Note:In the special case thatthe passcode has beenconfigured as None, thedisplay will blinkmomentarily when level 3is selected and level 3 willbe entered immediately

4. Press or toselect the required accesslevel. E.g. Level 3

5. Press or toenter the passcode.

When the correctpasscode is entered thedisplay momentarilychanges to !PASS, thenback to the start level toconfirm correct entry.

To go from a higher level to a lower level does not require entry of a passcode.

1. From any display press

to return to the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘ACCESS’

Page 74: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Access Levels 2704 Controller

4-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 75: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller The Summary Page

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 5-1

5. CHAPTER 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE.................................. 25.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE...........................................................25.1.1. To Select The Summary Page .....................................................................2

Page 76: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

The Summary Page 2704 Controller

5-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

5. Chapter 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE

5.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE

The Summary Page is a customised page which allows you to view and alter up to 10parameters in common use in your particular application. It is only available if it has beencustomised and turned on in configuration level.

The summary page may be promoted (in configuration level) to be the HOME page. If thesummary page is the HOME page it is shown under the following conditions:-

1. When the controller is switched on2. When the access mode is changed from configuration level to a different level

3. When and are pressed together (see 3.9)4. When a timeout (if configured) occurs

5.1.1. To Select The Summary Page

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Reason

3. Press to view up toten parameters which havebeen pre-defined inconfiguration level

This view shows fiveparameters:PV Loop 1The value of Dig 1 inputThe value of Dig 2 inputProgram SP 1Program Dig 1 Output

Note: If the Summarypage has not beenenabled in configurationlevel, the ‘SUMMARY’page header is notdisplayed

1. From any display press

to return to the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘SUMMARY’

Page 77: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-1

6. CHAPTER 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATION ...................... 26.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names..................................................................26.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?.............................................36.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS.......................46.3.1. Run..............................................................................................................46.3.2. Hold ............................................................................................................46.3.3. Reset............................................................................................................46.3.4. Servo ...........................................................................................................46.3.5. Hot Start ......................................................................................................46.3.6. Power Fail Recovery ...................................................................................56.3.7. Wait.............................................................................................................66.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak) ......................................................................76.3.9. Digital Inputs...............................................................................................86.3.10. Program User Values ................................................................................86.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES ...........................................................................96.4.1. Time To Target Programmer ......................................................................96.4.2.Ramp Rate Programmer ...............................................................................96.4.3. Segment Types............................................................................................96.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES.........................................................................116.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen.......................................................116.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen..........................126.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM..........................................136.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button ..........................................................................136.6.2. From Digital Inputs ...................................................................................136.6.3. From Digital Communications ..................................................................136.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page ............................................146.6.5. Run Parameter Tables ...............................................................................156.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM...................................................176.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages............................................................176.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) Parameters ........................................186.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program.....................................................206.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters.................................................216.8. EXAMPLES ...............................................................................................246.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate Programmer.....................................246.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer...............................286.8.3. To Apply Holdback...................................................................................296.8.4. To Apply Wait ..........................................................................................316.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run Mode .......................................................326.8.6. To Set Up Program Names .......................................................................336.8.7. To Set Up Segment Names .......................................................................34

Page 78: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6. Chapter 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATIONThis chapter explains Setpoint Programming and how to Create, Edit and Run programs.Parameters which are associated with setpoint program operation are also listed in tables as ageneral reference.

Note: The 2704 controller is an application specific controller and can be configured tothe preferences of a particular process, site or even user. This means that the displaysshown in this and following chapters may not be identical to those shown in yourinstrument. Displays shown in italics are user definable and may, therefore, varybetween instruments.

About this Chapter

This chapter describes:

◊ The meaning of setpoint programs

◊ Setpoint programming terminology

◊ Programmer types

◊ How to run, hold or reset a program

◊ How to create or edit a program

◊ Examples of how to set up specific features of a program

6.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names

Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in italics are customisable by the userwhen in configuration access level. The name of the parameter may vary, therefore,from instrument to instrument.Typical customisable parameter names are:

Program namesProfile Setpoint namesSegment names

Page 79: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-3

6.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?

Many applications need to vary the process value over time. Such applications need acontroller which varies a setpoint as a function of time. The 2704 controller will program upto three separate profiles. These may be temperature, pressure, light level, humidity, etc.,depending on the application, and are referred to as Profiled Setpoints (PSPs). A setpointprogram containing three profile setpoints is shown in Figure 6-1.

The Program is divided into a flexible number of Segments - each being a single timeduration, - and containing details for each profiled setpoint. The total number of segmentsavailable is 100 per program with a maximum of 500.A controller containing functionality to control profile setpoints against time is referred to asa Programmer. The 2704 programmer works on a single timebase for all programs.

Figure 6-1: A Setpoint Program

The profiled setpoints may be used as either control loop setpoints or independentparameters for retransmission or use in derived calculations.The 2704 may store up to 20 programs as standard, with up to 50 if purchased.

Segment

ProfileSetpoint1

ProfileSetpoint 2

ProfileSetpoint 3

Start (Run) 2h1h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h Time

Program

2

1

16 X Digital Events

PV

Segment 1Target

Segment 1Time

Page 80: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS

6.3.1. RunIn run the programmer varies the setpoint in accordance with the profile set in the activeprogram.

6.3.2. HoldIn hold the programmer is frozen at its current point. In this state you can make temporarychanges to program parameters such as a target setpoint, ramp rates and dwells (ifprogrammer configured for ramp rate) or segment duration (if programmer configured asTime to Target). Such changes will only remain effective until the end of the currentlyrunning segment, when they will be overwritten by the stored program values.

6.3.3. ResetIn reset the programmer is inactive and the controller behaves as a standard controller, withthe setpoint determined by the raise/lower buttons.

6.3.4. ServoWhen a program is run the setpoint can start from the initial controller setpoint or from thecurrent process value. Whichever it is the starting point is called the servo point. This can beset in the program.The usual method is to servo to the process value because this will produce a smooth andbumpless start to the process.If, however, when using a Ramp Rate programmer, it is essential to guarantee the time periodof the first segment it may be better to set the controller to servo to setpoint. (Note: in aTime to Target programmer the segment duration will always be determined by the setting ofthe Segment Duration parameter.)

6.3.5. Hot StartHot start can occur in any segment type, for any PSP but is most useful to ramp segments.When run is initiated it allows the program to automatically advance to the correct point inthe profile which corresponds to the operating value of the process. Hot start is enabled inconfiguration level and specifies which programmed variable to use when deciding thecorrect segment.

Page 81: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-5

6.3.6. Power Fail RecoveryIn the event of power fail to the controller, a strategy may be set in configuration level, whichdefines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power. These strategies include:

Continue The program runs from the last setpoint. This may cause fullpower to be applied to the process for a short period to heat theprocess back to its value prior to the power failure

Ramp back This will ramp the process value back to its original value at acontrolled rate. This will be the last encountered rate.

Reset The process is aborted by resetting the programHold Program The programmer will enter the HOLD state. The operator may

then change the state to Reset or Run. On exiting from Holdinto Run the program will continue, it will not ramp back.

Test Time This option makes use of the real time clock in the controller todetermine how long the power has been off. Two time periodscan be set which allows three strategies:

1. If the power is off for less than the first period, theprogrammer will continue from its last operating point

2. If the power is off for a time between the two timeboundaries, the controller will servo to the PV and rampback to the operating point using the previous ramp rate.

3. If the power is off for longer than the second time boundary,the programmer will reset.

Note:

The programmer takes about 25 seconds to start running afterpower is applied to the 2700. This delay should be taken intoconsideration when setting up the Test Time recovery parameter.

Page 82: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.3.7. WaitThree wait conditions are provided at the end of each segment which may be wired, inconfiguration level, using a ‘Toolkit Block’ expression or by a digital input. Each segmentmay then select No-Wait, Wait on Event A, Wait on Event B or Wait on Event C. When allprofile segments are complete, and the configured wait event is active, the program waitsuntil the wait event becomes in-active before progressing to the next segment.

Figure 6-2: Wait Events

See Section 6.7.4. for a description of operation.

Event OP

Event OP

Event Aor digitalinput

Event Bor digitalinput

WaitA

WaitB

WaitC

Programmer

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Wait = Wait onEvent A

Wait = OFF

Wait = Wait onEvent B

Segment 1 extendedby the wait period

Segment 3 extendedby the wait period

Page 83: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-7

6.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak)

Holdback freezes the program if the process value does not track the setpoint by an amountwhich can be set by the user. It may operate in any PSP type.In a Ramp it indicates that the process value is lagging the setpoint by more than a pre-setamount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up.In a Dwell it will freeze the dwell time if the difference between SP and PV exceeds pre-setlimits.In both cases it guarantees the correct soak period for the product. See also section 6.7.2.Holdback may be configured in three modes:• OFF - holdback does not operate• Applied to the complete program. Holdback operates the same way in every segment• To each individual segment. A different holdback type can be applied to each segment

Holdback Type defines how holdback operates. It may apply when:• The PV is below the SP by a pre-set value (Lo),• The PV is above the SP by a pre-set value(Hi)• The PV is below or above the SP by a pre-set value (Band).

In addition two levels of holdback are available per profile setpoint, per program. These aredefined as ‘Fine’ and ‘Course’.

Example:Holdback, operating in each segment, is often used in a temperature control application asdetailed below:-

During a ramp up period the holdback type may be set to deviation low. If the Process Valuelags the programmed rate of rise, holdback will stop the program until the PV catches up.This prevents the set program from entering the next segment until the PV has attained thecorrect temperature.

During a dwell period the holdback type may be set to deviation band. This guarantees thatthe dwell or soak period operates only when the process value is within both high and lowdeviation limits.

During a ramp down period the holdback type may be set to deviation high. If the processcannot cool at the rate set by the ramp down rate the program will be held until the processcatches up.

When a profile is placed into holdback the other profiles are (normally) not held. Theycontinue and rendezvous at the end of the segment.

Each segment may consist of up to three profiles. Two levels of holdback value, course andfine, may be applied for each profile of each segment in the PROGRAM EDIT Program page.

Page 84: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.3.9. Digital InputsDigital inputs are available on the controller which can be configured for the followingprogrammer functions:

Run Allows the program to be run from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Run input is edge triggered.

Hold Allows the program to be held from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Hold input is level triggered.

Reset Allows the program to be reset from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Reset input is level triggered.

Run/Hold Allows the program to be run or held from a single external inputsource

Run/Reset Allows the program to be run or reset from a single external inputsource

Advance Segment Selects the next segment from an external input sourceAdvance Program Selects the next program from an external input source. When this

event occurs, the controller display will change to programmerview. Subsequent changes of this input source will cause theprogram number to increment.

Holdback disabled Disables holdback from an external input source

For more information on digital inputs refer to Chapters 17 and 18. For configuration ofthese inputs see Engineering Manual Part No. HA026933.

6.3.10. Program User ValuesProgram User Values provide multiplexor facilities for the user. Each user value providesstorage for a number of event values (currently 100). Each user value will normally be wired(in software) to call up another feature.

The following example shows how the programmer user values may be used to call updifferent sets of pre-configured digital output values for different segments in a programmer.This would make use of the Pattern Generator described in Chapter 13, and assumes that anuser value has been wired to a Pattern Generator.

Program Segment 1 Program Segment 2 Program Segment 3 Program Segment xUser Value 1Value 1

User Value 1Value 6

User Value 1Value 11

User Value 1Value 15

Pattern Generatoroutput 1

Pattern Generatoroutput 6

Pattern Generatoroutput 11

Pattern Generatoroutput 15

In each segment a different pattern of digital outputs is set up from the single value set in theUser Value for each segment.

Page 85: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-9

6.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES

The programmer can be configured as Time to Target or Ramp Rate. A time to targetprogrammer requires fewer settings and is simple to use since all segments are the same. Atime to target programmer can, in general contain more segments than a ramp rate.

6.4.1. Time To Target ProgrammerEach segment consists of a single duration parameter and a set of target values for theprofiled variables.1. The duration specifies the time that the segment takes to change the profiled variables

from their current values to the new targets.2. A dwell type segment is set up by leaving the target setpoint at the previous value.3. A Step type segment is set up by setting the segment time to zero.

6.4.2. Ramp Rate ProgrammerEach segment can be specified by the operator as Ramp Rate, Dwell or Step.1. Each profiled setpoint must complete its segment before the programmer will move to the

next segment. If one ramp reaches its target setpoint ahead of the other variables, it willdwell at that value until the other variables have completed. The program will then moveto the next segment.

2. The duration parameter for a segment is read only. In this case the dwell period can bechanged when the program is in Hold..

3. The duration is determined by the longest profile setting.

6.4.3. Segment TypesA segment type can be defined as Profile, Go Back or End.

6.4.3.1. Profile

A profile segment may be set as:-

Ramp The setpoint ramps linearly , from its current value to a newvalue, either at a set rate (called ramp-rate programming), or in aset time (called time-to-target programming). You must specifythe ramp rate or the ramp time, and the target setpoint, whencreating or modifying a program.

Dwell The setpoint remains constant for a specified period at thespecified target. When creating programs the target is inheritedfrom the previous segment. When editing an existing program itis necessary to re-enter the target value. This allows the dwelltarget to be matched to a go-back segment.

Step The setpoint steps instantaneously from its current value to anew value at the beginning of a segment.

Page 86: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.4.3.2. Go Back Segment

Go Back allows segments in a program to be repeated by a set number of times. It is theequivalent of inserting ‘sub-programs’ on some controllers. Figure 6-2 shows an example ofa program which is required to repeat the same section a number of times and then continuethe program.A Go Back segment is used to save the total number of segments required in a program andto simplify setting up. When planning a program it is advisable to ensure that the end andstart setpoints of the program are the same otherwise it will step to the different levels. A GoBack segment. is defined when editing a program, see section 6.7.4.

Figure 6-3: An Example of a Program with Repeating Section

6.4.3.3. End Segment

The last segment in a program is normally defined as an End segmentThe program either ends, repeats or resets in this segment. You specify which is the casewhen you create, or modify, the program. When the program ends, the programmer is putinto either, a continuous dwell state with all outputs staying unchanged, or the reset state.

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 7Segments 3 to 6

At this point Go Back to segment 3

Segment 6 isdefined as a GoBack segment

This section is repeated ‘n’ times

Page 87: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-11

6.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES

There are three pages associated with Programmer Operation. These are:-

1. PROGRAM MIMIC. This shows a trend plot of a running program

2. PROGRAM RUN. This shows a list of parameters associated with a running program

3. PROGRAM EDIT. This allows programs to be set up and edited

The Navigation Diagram, section 3.12, shows where these screens are found.

6.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

The mimic plots theworking SP for each PSPconfigured.

3. Press to display themimic view.

The full list of parameters is shown in the following table

5. Parameters are shown atthe bottom of the screenwhich show the segmentvalues.

Press to select eachparameter in turn.

The value of a parameterprefixed by ! can be

changed using or

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAMMIMIC’

600

S01/041372

-200

CurrentTime

CurrentSP

ControllerRange

Segment No/Totalnumber of segments -Customised Name

Prog No: Customised NameProg No: Customised Name

Prog No:Customised Name

Page 88: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen

Table Number:

6.4.2

These parameters are available on theProgrammer Mimic screen

PROGRAM MIMIC

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining h: m: s L1 R/O

PSP1 Target PSP1 target setpoint for thecurrent segment

Displayrange

L1 R/O

PSP1 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP1

h: m: s L1 R/O

PSP1 Rate PSP1 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange

L1 R/O

PSP2 Target PSP2 target setpoint for thecurrent segment

Displayrange

L1 R/O

PSP2 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP2

h: m: s L1 R/O

PSP2 Rate PSP2 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange

L1 R/O

PSP3 Target PSP3 target setpoint for thecurrent segment

Displayrange

L1 R/O

PSP3 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP3

h: m: s L1 R/O

PSP3 Rate PSP3 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange

L1 R/O

Digital Outputs Shows the state of eachdigital output configured

æ

= Off

æ = On

L1 R/O

Page 89: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-13

6.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM

There are four ways to control the status of a program as follows:

6.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button

6.6.1.1. To Run a Program

If the program is in Reset mode, press the ‘PROG’ button once. A pop up window isdisplayed:

Press the PROG button again to select ‘Run’

The symbol in the top left of the display changes to

6.6.1.2. To Hold a Program

A program can only be held from Run mode. Press the ‘PROG’ button once. The pop upwindow is again displayed showing ‘Run’. Press the ‘PROG’ button again. The message inthe pop up window changes to ‘Hold’ .

The symbol in the top left of the display changes to.

6.6.1.3. To Reset a Program

Press the ‘PROG’ button once. The pop up window is again displayed showing ‘Run’ or‘Hold’. Press the ‘PROG’ button again and hold it pressed for 2 seconds. The messagechanges to ‘Reset’.

The symbol in the top left of the display changes to

6.6.2. From Digital InputsIf digital inputs have been configured and wired for an external RUN, HOLD or RESET,activate the relevant digital input. This will normally be activated from an external switch.

6.6.3. From Digital CommunicationsIf a PC running SCADA package or iTools is connected to the controller via the digitalcommunications module, the programmer status may be changed from this package.

Page 90: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page

To Run, Hold or Reset a program from the Programmer Run page:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM RUN’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘General’

Warning!Fast run allows the program to be tested by quickly runningthrough the program segments. If the controller isconnected to the process, ensure that the process is notaffected if fast run is selected.

The default value, No, means that the program will run atthe set rate

Shows the current statusof the programThe choices are:-Run see 6.2.1Hold see 6.2.2Reset see 6.2.3

5. Press to select thelist of parameters forrunning the program.

6. If the Program Number iscorrect and Fast Run is

not required, press toscroll to ‘ProgramStatus’

7. Press or toselect R n

Page 91: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-15

6.6.5. Run Parameter Tables

Table Number:

6.6.5a

These parameters are displayed for arunning program

PROGRAM RUN(General Page)

ParameterName

Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Prog DOs Digital outputs summary

(Up to 16)

æ

= Offæ = On

L1

Time Remaining Time remaining to end ofprogram

NotRunning toh:mm:ss

L3

Days Remaining Number of days left for theprogrammer to run

0 to 255 L3

Fast Run Allows the program to fast run No

Yes

No L3.Alterable inreset orcomplete

Program Status Displays the status of theprogram

ResetRunHoldComplete

L1.

Prog Time Elap Program time elapsed h: mm: ss R/O

Prog Cycle Rem Remaining number of cycles 1 to 999 L1 R/O

(only shownif ‘ProgCycles’ > 1)

Total Segments Number of segments in therunning program

0 to 100 R/O

SegmentNumber

The currently running segmentnumber

1 to 100 L1 R/O

Segment Type Running program segmenttypeProfile = normal segmentEnd Segment = End of progGo Back =repeat part of prog

Profile

EndSegment

Go Back

Profile L1 R/O

Alterable inHold

Segment Name A user defined name for thesegment

DefaultText

L1 R/O

Seg Time Rem Time remaining in the currentsegment

d: h: m: s L1. R/O

Alterable ifTime ToTarget progand in Hold

Page 92: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Wait Status Wait Status No WaitEvent AEvent BEvent C

No Wait R/O

Wait Condition Wait condition for the runningsegment

No WaitEvent AEvent BEvent C

No Wait L1.Alterable inHold

Prog User Val 1 Active Programmer User Val 1 L1

Prog User Val 2 Active Programmer User Val 2 L1

Goback Rem Number of repeat cyclesremaining

1 to 999 R/O

End Action The state required in the endsegment

DwellReset

R/O

Prog Reset DO These are the digital events inReset

R/OOnly ifconfigured.

Reset UsrVal1 Reset prog user 1 values L3

Reset UsrVal1 Reset prog user 1 values L3

Table Number:

6.6.5b

These parameters are associated withProfiled Setpoint number 1

PROGRAM RUN

(PSP1 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining h: m: s

PSP1 Type Running segment type forprofiled setpoint 1

StepDwellRamp

R/O - shownin RampRate prog.

PSP1 WSP Working setpoint for profiledsetpoint 1

Displayrange 1

L1. Alterablein Hold

PSP1 Target Running segment target forprofiled setpoint 1

Displayrange 1

L1. Alterablein Hold

PSP1 Dwell Tm Time remaining in runningsegment for profiled SP 1

Displayrange

L1. Alterablein Hold

PSP1 Rate Running segment rate forprofiled setpoint 1

Displayrange 1

L1. Not inTime ToTarget prog

PSP1 HBk Appl Holdback applied for profiledsetpoint 1

No

Yes

R/O - shownif configured

1. Range limited by user defined upper and lower limits

Table 6.6.5b is repeated for PSP2 parameters and PSP3 parameters

ææææ

Page 93: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-17

6.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM

To create or edit a program it is first necessary to define the parameters associated with theoverall program. These parameters will be found under the page header ‘PROGRAM EDIT(Program)’, see section 6.7.1. and 6.7.2.

Then set up the parameters which define each individual segment. These parameters will befound in the page ‘PROGRAM EDIT (Segments)’, see section 6.7.3. and 6.7.4.

Notes:-1. A running program cannot be edited, it must be put into Reset or Hold mode.

2. Changes can be made to any segment of a currently running program as follows:-

• To the currently running segment - use the PROGRAM RUN page. These changes arealways temporary and apply to the current run only

• To segments subsequent to the current segment - use the PROGRAM EDIT page. Thesechanges are always permanent and will apply to subsequent runs Changes can be made tothe current segment in the PROGRAM EDIT page but do not take effect in the currentlyrunning program.

3. Other programs can be created or edited when another program is running.

6.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

This page allows theoverall programmerparameters to be defined

The value of a parameterprefixed by ! can be

changed using or

The full list of parameters isshown in the following table

1. From any display press to access the page headermenu.

2. Press or to select‘PROGRAM EDIT’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Program’

5. Press to showparameters

6. Press again to selectthe highlighted parameter

Page 94: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) ParametersTable Number:

6.7.2

These parameters affect the overallprogram. Only shown at Level 3.

PROGRAM EDIT

(Program Page)

ParameterName

Parameter Description Value Default Access Level

ProgramNumber

Selects the programnumber to be edited

1 to 20 or

1 to 50

1 L1

Hbk Mode Holdback mode

None = no holdbackapplied

Per prog = common toprog

Per seg = active in everysegment

None

Per Program

PerSegment

None L1

PSP1 HBkType

Holdback type for PSP1(per program)

These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value

Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

CourseBand

Off L1

Only displayedif Per Programconfigured

PSP1FineHbk

Fine holdback value forPSP1

DisplayRange

0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off

PSP1CourseHbk

Course holdback value forPSP1

DisplayRange

0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off

The next six parameters are only displayed if PSP2 and PSP3 are configured

PSP2 HbkType

Holdback type for PSP2

These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value

Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

Course Bnd

Off L1

PSP2FineHbk

Fine holdback value forPSP2

DisplayRange

0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off

PSP2 Course holdback value for Display 0 L3. Only

Page 95: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-19

CourseHbk PSP2 Range displayed if HBkType _ Off

PSP3 HbkType

Holdback type for PSP3

These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value.

Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

Course Bnd

Off L1

PSP3FineHbk

Fine holdback value forPSP3

DisplayRange

0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off

PSP3CourseHbk

Course holdback value forPSP3

DisplayRange

0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off

PSP3 HbkValue

Holdback value for PSP3 SP1 hi limitto

SP1 lo limit

0 L3

Hot StartPSP

Allows hot start to beapplied to each PSP.

See also 6.3.5.

None

PSP1

PSP2

PSP3

None L3. Onlyappears if HotStart option hasbeen enabled inconfig level.

Rate Units Rate units for a RampRate Programmer

Per Second

Per Minute

Per Hour

L3. Onlydisplayed if theprogrammer isRamp Rate

Prog Cycles Sets the number of timesthe complete program isexecuted.

Continuousto 999

Continuous L1

End Action Defines the action in theend segment.

Dwell - the program willdwell indefinitely at theconditions set in the endsegment.

Reset - the program willreset to the startconditions.

Dwell

Reset

L1

ProgramName

Allows a user definedname to be given to theprogram number

User string L1

Page 96: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

.

If the program exists, thesegment details are displayed

If the program is new,confirm as instructed onthe display

Create Prg: 2?

ªTCancel °TOK

Further parameters may be accessed and adjusted in the same way. These are listed togetherwith an explanation of their function in the following table

After a few seconds orwhen ª is pressed thedisplay goes to thesegment parameters .

Up to 100 segments areavailable per program

4. Press to select thesegment parameters

5. Press or toscroll up or down the listof parameters.

6. Press again tochoose parameter.

The value or state of aparameter prefixed by ! can

be changed using or

Tip -- A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing

or respectively

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM EDIT’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Segment’

Page 97: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-21

6.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters

Table Number:

6.6.4.

These parameters allow you to set upeach segment in the program

PROGRAM EDIT

(Segment)

ParameterName

Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

ProgramNumber

Selects the program numberto be edited

1 to 20

(or 50)

L1

SegmentNumber

Selects the segment numberto be edited

1 to 100 L1

Segment Type Segment type Profile

EndSegment

Go Back

Profile L1

Profile = a normal segment

End Segment = the last segment in the program (press ° to confirm)

Go Back = repeat part of program. Not shown for segment 1.

PSP1 Type Profile setpoint 1 type Step

Dwell

Ramp

L1.

Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End

PSP1 Target Profile setpoint 1 target value SP1 lo limittoSP1 hi limit

0 L2

PSP1 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 1 dwell time d : h : m : s L1.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP1 Rate Profile setpoint 1 rate L2.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP1 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 1 holdbacktype

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

CourseBand

Off L2.

Only shown if holdback is configured per segment

Page 98: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

The next ten parameters are only displayed if PSP2 and PSP3 are configured

PSP2 Type Profile setpoint 2 type StepDwellRamp

L2.

Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End

PSP2 Target Profile setpoint 2 target value SP2 lo limittoSP2 hi limit

0 L2

PSP2 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 2 dwell time d : h : m : s L2.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP2 Rate Profile setpoint 2 rate L2.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP2 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 2 holdbacktype

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

CourseBand

Off L2.

Only shown if holdback is configured per segment

PSP3 Type Profile setpoint 3 type StepDwellRamp

L2.

Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End

PSP3 Target Profile setpoint 3 target value SP3 lo limittoSP3 hi limit

0 L2

PSP3 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 3 dwell time d : h : m : s L2.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP3 Rate Profile setpoint 3 rate L2.

Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End

PSP3 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 3 holdbacktype

Off

Fine Lo

Fine Hi

Fine Band

Course Lo

Course Hi

CourseBand

Off L2.

Only shown if holdback is configured per segment

Page 99: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-23

Seg Duration Duration for Time to Targetprogrammer only

d : h : m : s L2.

Wait Event Wait if selected event is true No waitEvent AEvent BEvent C

No Wait L2.

Only shown if wait events configured

Prog User Val 1 Allows a Programmer UserVal to be chosen. See alsosection 6.3.10.

0 to 100 0 L1

Only shown if Prog User Val 1 is configured

Prog User Val 2 Allows a Programmer UserVal to be chosen. See alsosection 6.3.10.

0 to 100 0 L1

Only shown if Prog User Val 2 is configured

Prog DO Values Sets programmer eventoutputs on or off

L2.

Only shown if Dout configured

GoBack to Seg Allows repeat segments to beset up within a profile. Goback defines the point in theprogram where the repeatsegments are entered.

1 to no. ofsegments

L2.

Only shown if segment. type is Go Back

Go Back Cycles Sets up the number of timesthe segments are repeated

1 to 999 1 L2.

Only shown if segment. type is Go Back

Segment Name Allows a user defined nameto be chosen

DefaultText to Usr50

DefaultText

L1

Page 100: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-24 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.8. EXAMPLES

6.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate ProgrammerDo This This Is The Display You

Should SeeAdditional Notes

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM EDIT’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Segment’

To select a new ProgramNumber.

Press again

Press or tochange the ProgramNumber.

If this is a new program,the message‘Create Prog x?’ will bedisplayed.

Press to confirm

5. Press to show the listof parameters

6. Press or toscroll to the nextparameter in the list(Segment Number)

To select a new SegmentNumber.

Repeat the above

Page 101: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-25

7. Press to select‘Segment Type’

The setpoint will ramp to600 units

When a parameter value isselected to be altered it isunderlined with a flashingcursor.

Select:-Ramp to ramp the setpointup or downDwell to dwellStep to jump from thecurrent setpoint to a newtarget

To select a differentSegment Type:.

Press again

Press or to changethe Segment TypeThe choices are:.

Profile - for Ramp/Dwell/StepEnd SegmentGo Back - to repeatsegments of a program (notsegment 1)

8. Press to select‘PSP1 Type’

To set PSP1 Type to Ramp:

9. Press to select‘PSP1 Type’

10. Press or toselect ‘Ramp’

11. Press to select‘PSP1 Target’

12. Press or toadjust the value

When a parameter value ishighlighted with a

continuous bar use or

to scroll the previousor next parameter.When it is underlined with

a flashing cursor, use to scroll to the nextparameter

Page 102: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-26 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

The setpoint will ramp to600 at the rate of 25 unitsper sec, min or hour, as setin PROGRAM EDIT(Program Page).

If PSP1 Type = DwellThis parameter is Dwell Tm

If PSP1 Type = StepThis parameter is omitted

15. Continue to press to select further parameters for Segment 1, and to change their

values using or .

16. Now set up Segment 2 by repeating the above steps.

Tip -- A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing or

respectively

17. Repeat the procedure until all segments have been set up. The last segment should bedefined as ‘Segment Type = End Segment’ .

13. Press to select‘PSP1 Rate’

14. Press or toadjust the value

Page 103: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-27

If Wait Events have been configured:-

If Digital Event Outputs have been Configured:-

If Programmer User Values have been configured

The first digital output willalternate between and _indicating that it can bechanged.

= Offæ = On

1. Press to select‘Prog DO Val’

2. Press or to turna digital output On or Off.

3. Press to scrollthrough each event outputin turn

1. Press to select‘Prog Usr Val 1 (or 2)’

2. Press or toselect the value to use.

1. Press to select ‘WaitEvent’

2. Press or to selectthe ‘wait event’

The choice are:-No WaitEvent AEvent BEventC

See also 6.7.4

Page 104: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-28 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer

This is the same as the previous procedure except that there are no Dwell, Rate or Step PSPs.They are all TimePSPs.Steps 1 to 10 shown in the Ramp Rate example are the same for the Time to Targetprogrammer. From the PROGRAM EDIT (Segment Page) parameters:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

For any segment _ 1, thisvalue will normally beinherited from the Targetlevel of the previoussegment.

11. Press to select ‘PSP1Target’

12. Press or to set thetarget level of the segmenteg 100

The setpoint will ramp to100 at the rate of 1 unitper sec, min or hour

As in the previousexample, if PSP2, PSP3,Wait Events and EventOutputs have beenconfigured they willappear here.

For a ramp set PSP-Target to a new value

For a dwell set PSP- tothe previous value.

13. Press to scroll to ‘SegDuration’

14. Press or to set thetarget level of the segmenteg 0:01:00

Repeat the procedure until all segments have been set up. The last segment should bedefined as ‘Segment Type = End Segment’ .

Tip -- There are two ways to return to a previous parameter in a list.

1. A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing or respectively

2. Press once and use the or button

Page 105: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-29

6.8.3. To Apply HoldbackTo apply holdback (see also 6.3.8) to each segment of the program or to the overall program,follow this procedure:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

This is fully described in6.7.1.

1. Select PROGRAM EDIT(Program Page)

This parameter onlyappears if Holdback hasbeen configured.

If per program is chosenthe next parameter is‘HBk Type’.

If per segment is chosenthe parameter ‘HBk Type’does not appear.

3. Press to choose‘HBk Mode’

4. Press to select ‘HBkMode’

5. Press or tochoose Per Program (orPer Segment)

For HBk Mode = per program.

6. Press to select PSP1HBk Type

7. Press or tochoose the type eg FineLo

The choices are:-Off; Fine Lo; Fine Hi; FineBand; Coarse Lo: CoarseHi; Coarse Band.

If HBk Type ≠ Off, thenext parameter allows theholdback value to be setup.

2. Press to show the listof parameters

Page 106: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-30 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10. Repeat the above steps forPSP2 and PSP3 if thesehave been configured.

Note:If holdback per segment is chosen the holdback type can be set up in each segment. Theholdback value, however, is the same for each segment.

In this example holdbackwill occur in any segmentof the program if the PVfalls by more than 5 unitsbelow the SP.

8. Press to select PSP1Fine HBk

9. Press or to set thevalue of the Fine Holdback

Page 107: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-31

6.8.4. To Apply WaitThe wait feature prevents the programmer from proceeding to the next segment if an event istrue (see also section 6.3.7.). It only applies to controllers which have been ‘wired’ for waitevents in configuration level. If the controller has been configured for ‘Wait’, the operatorcan set up the conditions as follows:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Segment Page)

This selects the WaitEvent which will preventthe program fromproceeding to the nextsegment.

The choices are:-

NoWait

The waitconditiondoes notapply to theselectedsegment

EventA (Bor C)

The selectedsegment willwait for eventA (B or C) tobecome falsebefore theprogramcontinues

2. Press to show the listof parameters

3. Press or toscroll to ‘Wait Event’

4. Press to select ‘WaitEvent’

5. Press or tochoose the event onwhich the programmershould wait eg ‘Event A’

Page 108: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-32 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run ModeThe status of ’Wait’ is displayed in the ‘PROGRAM RUN’ page as follows:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. Select ‘PROGRAM RUN(General Page)

The status is off if notwaiting and true if waiting.The choices are:-

NoWait

The programis not waiting

EventA (Bor C)

The programis waiting onevent A (B orC)

4. Press to scroll to‘Wait Condition’

Wait condition is the WaitEvent set up in eachsegment, e.g. WaitAmeans - ‘the eventcausing a wait in thissegment’.

In ‘Hold’ this parametercan be changed to ‘NoWait’ to override a waitcondition.

The choices are:-No WaitEvent A (B or C)

The condition can bechanged if the program isin Hold

2. Press to show theparameter list

3. Press or toscroll to ‘Wait Status’

5. Press to select the‘Wait Condition’

6. Press or tooverride the condition (NoWait), or to select adifferent event (Event A, Bor C)

Page 109: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Programmer Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-33

6.8.6. To Set Up Program NamesTo produce a user defined program name:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Program) page header

2. Press to showparameters

3. Press again to select‘Program Number’

4. Press or toselect the programnumber

Program 1 is the defaultname of the program.

A full range of charactersis available includingcapitals, numbers andcommon symbols

5. Press to scroll to‘Program Name’

6. Press or tochange the highlightedcharacter to one of yourchoice

7. Press to select the next character which you wish to change

8. Then Press or to change the character

9. Continue until the program name of your choice is displayed. A name of up to 16characters can be entered.

This name will be displayed on every view which contains Program Name.

Page 110: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Programmer Operation 2704 Controller

6-34 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6.8.7. To Set Up Segment NamesEvery segment can be given a name. The name is called up from ‘User Text’ and isdisplayed on the programmer mimic diagram. User Text is set up in configuration level asexplained in 2700 Engineering Manual Part No. HA026502.To select segment names:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Segment) page header

2. Press to showparameters

3. Press again to select‘Program Number’

4. Press or to selectthe number of the program

Default Text will displaythe segment number onlyon the programmermimic.

Other choices are:-01:Usr 1 to 50:Usr 50.This gives up to 50 userdefined names.

7. Press to scroll to‘Segment Name’

8. Press or toselect the required textfrom the User Text list

5. Press to scroll to‘Segment Number’

6. Press or toselect the segment to benamed

Page 111: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Digital Programmer

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-1

6A. CHAPTER 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER ........................ 26A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER?.......................................26A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer..............................................................36A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page........................................................................46A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List ..............................56A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page .....................................................................66A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY ...................................................................6

Page 112: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Digital Programmer 2704 Controller

6A-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6A. Chapter 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER

6A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER?

The digital programmer provides a timed control of a single digital output. It may be usedduring any segment of a Setpoint Programmer or it may be used independently of theSetpoint Programmer.

A sequence of eight Off and On times may be set for the output and up to four DigitalPrograms can be set. Figure 6-4 shows an example of a timed digital output program.

Figure 6A-1: An Example of a Programmed Digital Output

Step Time DescriptionOn 1 1:00:00.0 On starting the sequence the output will be ON for 1 hourOff 1 0:30:00.0 The output switches OFF for 30 minutesOn 2 0:05:00.0 The output switches ON for 5 minutesOff 2 0:30:00.0 The output switches OFF for 30 minutesOn 3 1:00:00.0 The output switches ON for 1 hourOff 3 0:25:00.0 The output switches OFF for 25 minutesOn 4 0:10:00.0 The output switches ON for 10 minutesOff 4 0:00:00.0On 5 0:00:00.0Off 5 0:00:00.0 The step is omitted for any time set to zeroOn 6 0:00:00.0Off 7 0:00:00.0On 8 1:10:00.0 The output switches ON for 1 hour 10 minutesOff 8 0:40:00.0 The output switches OFF for 40 minutes and is then reset to the start

of the sequence

The sequence may be run by:

1. Setting the ‘Run/Hold’ parameter to On

2. From an external source such as a push-button switch wired to a digital input

3. In any segment of a setpoint program if it has been wired, for example, to a ProgrammerUser Value.

Time

On

Off

On 1 On 2 On 3 On 4 On 8

Off 1 Off 2 Off 3 Off 8

Page 113: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Digital Programmer

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-3

6A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘DIGITAL PROG’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Edit Program’

5. Press to show the listof parameters

6. Press again to select‘Prog Select’

7. Press or tochange the programnumber if required

Up to four programs canbe chosen

8. Press to select ‘On1’

9. Press or toincrease or decrease theon time for the first outputin the sequence

10. Repeat for the eight Onand Off periods whichmake up the sequence

Tip --To enter a large time

period press and together. This willunderline the mins andhours sectionsindependently each time

the button is pressed.

The hours/mins can thenbe raised or lowered using

or

The full list of parametersis shown in the followingtable

Page 114: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Digital Programmer 2704 Controller

6A-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page

Table Number:

6A.1.2.

These parameters edit the digitalprogrammer

DIGITAL PROG

(Edit Program Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Prog Select Program select Prog 1 toProg 4

Prog 1 L3

On 1 On period 1 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 1 On period 1 0:00:00.0 0:00:00.0 L3

On 2 On period 2 to 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 2 On period 2 99:59:59.9 0:00:00.0 L3

On 3 On period 3 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 3 On period 3 If this 0:00:00.0 L3

On 4 On period 4 setting is 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 4 On period 4 exceeded 0:00:00.0 L3

On 5 On period 5 HHHH is 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 5 On period 5 displayed. 0:00:00.0 L3

On 6 On period 6 To reduce 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 6 On period 6 the value 0:00:00.0 L3

On 7 On period 7 Press and 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 7 On period 7 hold 0:00:00.0 L3

On 8 On period 8 button 0:00:00.0 L3

Off 8 On period 8 0:00:00.0 L3

Page 115: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Digital Programmer

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-5

6A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From any display press

to access the pageheader menu.

2. Press or toselect ‘DIGITAL PROG’

3. Press to show sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Dig Prog 1’

5. Press to show the listof parameters

6. Press again to select‘Reset Disable

7. Press or to ‘On’

When a digital program iscomplete, this parameter isreset to Off

8. Press to select‘Run/Hold’

9. Press or to ‘On’

When a digital program iscomplete, this parameter isreset to Off

The full list of parametersis shown in the followingtable

Page 116: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Digital Programmer 2704 Controller

6A-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

6A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page

Table Number:

6A.1.4.

These parameters are associated withDigital Programs 1 to 4

DIGITAL PROG

(Dig Prog x Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Reset Disable Reset Off

On

Off L1

Run/Hold Run or hold Off

On

Off L1

OP Enable Enables the output Off

On

Off L1

Reset on PFail Power fail response Off

On

Off L3

Program Cycle Number of cycles for thesequence

Continuousto 999

Continuous L1

Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining 0:00:00.0to99:59:59.9

L1

Output Shows the current state ofthe output

Off

On

L1

Output (Inv) Shows the current invertedstate of the output

Off

On

L1

Prg End Program complete

Off = prog running`

On = prog complete

Off

On

L1 R/O

6A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY

In the event of a power fail to the controller, a parameter, ‘Reset on Pfail’, may be set inconfiguration level which defines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power.If this parameter = ‘On’ then ‘Run/Hold’ =’Off’ and ‘Reset Disable’ = ‘Off’ at power up.

If Run/Hold and Reset Disable have been soft wired in configuration level they override thisstate.

Page 117: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-1

7. CHAPTER 7 ALARM OPERATION .................................... 27.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS ............................................27.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names..................................................................27.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER .............................37.2.1. Full Scale High............................................................................................37.2.2. Full Scale Low ............................................................................................37.2.3. Deviation High Alarm.................................................................................47.2.4. Deviation Low Alarm..................................................................................47.2.5. Deviation Band ...........................................................................................57.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction) ..............................................67.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction)................................................67.3. BLOCKING ALARMS ...............................................................................77.3.1. Full Scale Low With Blocking....................................................................77.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking ........................................................77.3.3. Deviation Band With Blocking ...................................................................87.4. LATCHING ALARMS................................................................................97.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic Reset ............................97.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset ..............................107.4.3. Grouped Alarms........................................................................................107.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED ........................................................117.5.1. Alarm Delay Time.....................................................................................117.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE...........................................................127.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters .................................................................137.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.........................................................157.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm............................................................167.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS.........................177.9. ALARM PARAMETERS..........................................................................187.9.1. ALARMS (LP1 Page) Parameters ............................................................187.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters.....................................................197.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters.....................................................207.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters....................................................217.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters.........................................................22

Page 118: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7. Chapter 7 ALARM OPERATION

7.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS

Alarms are used to alert an operator when a pre-set level or condition has been exceeded.They are normally used to switch an output - usually a relay - to provide interlocking of themachine or plant or external audio or visual indication of the condition.

Soft Alarms are indication only within the controller and are not attached to an output(relay).

Events - can also be alarms - but are generally defined as conditions which occur as part ofthe normal operation of the plant. They do not generally require operator intervention. Anexample might be to open/close a vent during a programmer cycle.The controller does not display the alarm status on the front panel.

For the purposes of the operation of this controller, alarms and events can be considered thesame.

7.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names

Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in italics are customisable by the userwhen in configuration access level. The name of the parameter may vary, therefore,from instrument to instrument.Typical customisable parameter names are:Alarm namesLoop namesModule and input namesCustom unitsPromoted parameters

Page 119: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-3

Hysteresis is thedifference betweenthe alarm ON valueand the alarm OFFvalue. It is used toprevent relay chatter.

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

Alarmsetpoint

7.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER

This section describes graphically the operation of different types of alarm used in the 2704controller. The graphs show measured value plotted against time. The measured value maybe any analogue value available in the controller.

7.2.1. Full Scale High

The Process Variable (PV) exceeds a set high level

7.2.2. Full Scale Low

The Process Variable (PV) exceeds a set low level

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

↑Alarmsetpoint

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

Page 120: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.2.3. Deviation High AlarmThe alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint ispositive by greater than the alarm setpoint.

Note: For User Analogue Value the deviation is the difference between the two user wiredanalogue inputs.

7.2.4. Deviation Low AlarmThe alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint isnegative by greater than the alarm setpoint.

Note: For User Analogue Value the deviation is the difference between the two user wiredanalogue inputs.

ProcessVariable

AlarmSetpoint

WorkingSetpoint

U

HysteresisS

TimeT

S

PV Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

U

S

ProcessVariable

AlarmSetpoint

WorkingSetpoint

TimeT

S

PV

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

U

Hysteresis

S

U

S

Page 121: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-5

7.2.5. Deviation BandA deviation band alarm monitors the process variable and the working setpoint andcontinuously compares the difference against the alarm setpoint. If the difference is eithernegative by less than, or positive by greater than the alarm setpoint, the alarm state will beactive.

ProcessVariable

Alarm Setpoint

WorkingSetpoint

TimeT

S

PV

Alarm Setpoint

Alarm ON

Alarm OFFU

Hysteresis

S

U

SU

Hysteresis

S

U

S

Page 122: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction)The Process Value falls faster than the alarm setting.

7.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction)The Process Value rises faster than the alarm setting.

Notes:1. Separate alarms are required for positive and negative rates of change2. An alarm is indicated during the period that the actual rate of change is greater than the

set rate of change.3. There may be a small delay before the instrument displays an alarm condition since the

instrument requires several samples. This delay increases if the set value and actual valueare close together

4. A hysteresis value of, say, 1 unit per second will prevent the alarm from ‘chattering’ ifthe rate of change varies by this amount

Time→

↑PV

↑Hysteresis

NegativeRate of

Change setto x units per

Actual rate ofchange > x

units per min

Alarm On

Alarm Off

Time →

↑PV

↑Hysteresis

Positive Rateof Change

set to x unitsper min

Actual rate ofchange > x

units per min

Alarm On

Alarm Off

Page 123: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-7

7.3. BLOCKING ALARMS

A Blocking Alarm only occurs after it has been through a start up phase. It is typically usedto prevent alarms from being indicated until the process has settled to its normal workingconditions.

7.3.1. Full Scale Low With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low alarm has first entered a safe state.The next time a low alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active.

7.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when high alarm has first entered a safe state.The next time a high alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active.

i.e. If the controller ispowered up with PV >’Hi Alarm SP’ no alarmis indicated. The PVmust reduce below the‘High Alarm SP’ andincrease again to > ‘HiAlarm SP’. The alarmcondition will then beindicated.If the controller ispowered up with PV <‘Hi Alarm SP’ an alarmis indicated as soon asPV > ‘Hi Alarm SP’

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

↑Alarmsetpoint

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

ProcessVariable

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

Alarmsetpoint

ProcessVariable

Page 124: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.3.3. Deviation Band With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low deviation alarm has first entered asafe state. The next time an alarm occurs, whether high band or low band will cause thealarm to become active.

AlarmOn

Process Variable

AlarmOff

Alarm Setpoint

WorkingSetpoint

AlarmOff

TimeT

S

PVAlarm

OnAlarm

OffAlarm

OnAlarm

Off

Alarm Setpoint

U

SU

Hysteresis

S

U

Hysteresis

S

U

S

Page 125: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-9

7.4. LATCHING ALARMS

The alarm is indicated until it is acknowledged by the user. Acknowledgement of an alarmcan be through the controller front buttons, from an external source using a digital input tothe controller or through digital communications.

There are two ways that the alarm can be acknowledged:

1. Automatic Reset. The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition isremoved AND the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement can occur BEFOREthe alarm condition is removed.

2. Manual Reset. The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is

removed AND the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement can only occurAFTER the alarm condition is removed.

These are shown below for a Full Scale High Alarm

7.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic ResetThe alarm is displayed until it is acknowledged

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

Alarmsetpoint

Automatic Reset

Once the alarm has been acknowledged it willclear when it is no longer true

Alarm Acknowledged

Page 126: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset

7.4.3. Grouped Alarms

Alarms can be associated with different aspects of the process. They are grouped inaccordance with the functions they perform as follows:

Loop Alarms Alarms associated with each control loop. Examples are: High,Low, Deviation and Rate of Change. Two alarms are available foreach loop. On a new controller these are the only alarms which areconfigured - those listed below must be enabled in configurationlevel, see Engineering Handbook HA026761.

PV Input Alarms Alarms which operate on the PV input. Examples are: High andLow. Two alarms are available with this input.

Analogue InputAlarms

Alarms which operate on the analogue input. Examples are: Highand Low. Two alarms are available with this input.

Module Alarms Alarms which operate on each plug in module. These can be inputor output alarms depending upon the function of the module fitted.These alarms are associated with modules 1, 3, 4, 5, & 6, sincemodule 2 is reserved as a an extra memory module

User Alarms Eight undedicated alarms which can be wired to any variable.

Alarm ON

Alarm OFF

Time →

↑MV

↓Hysteresis

Alarmsetpoint

Manual Reset

Alarm Acknowledged

Acknowledging here will notreset the alarm because it is stillin an alarm condition

The alarm must first clearbefore it can be reset.

Page 127: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-11

7.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED

When an alarm occurs a message will appear on the display which will indicate the sourceand the type of alarm. The format of this alarm message is:

When the alarm has been acknowledged the message shown in the banner of the pop upwindow above will now be shown in the Loop Display page.The symbol will be shown steady in the top banner of any page if any alarm is still present.

If a relay has been connected to the output of the alarm, it will operate to allow an externalbeacon or audible device to be activated. The relay will be de-activated when the alarm isacknowledged.

7.5.1. Alarm Delay TimeA delay time can be set for each alarm between the occurrence of the alarm and the indicationof the alarm in the controller. This is useful to prevent spurious alarms from being indicatedin some noisy or rapidly changing processes.To set delay time the controller must be placed in Configuration level. This is described inthe 2704 Engineering Handbook Part No HA026933.

If delay time has been configured for the alarm the user may be aware that the occurrence ofan alarm may not necessarily correspond with the display of the alarm

Press ª+° to Ack

:LP1

Full Scale LowAlarm source

Alarm message

Instruction

alternates for an unacknowledgedalarm

Page 128: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE

The status of alarms is displayed in the Alarm Summary page. To inspect the status:

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From any display press

as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu

2. Press or toselect ‘ALARMS’

The first sub-header isSummary.

Further sub-headers onlyappear if the alarms havebeen configured.

3. Press to displaysub-headers

4. Press to display asummary of alarmparameters

5. Press or toscroll down the list ofalarm messages.

The full list of parameters is shown in the following table

The alarm message willalternate between thesource of the alarm andthe type of alarm. It canbe acknowledged fromeither view.

For a non-latched alarm,the message willdisappear when the alarmis no longer present.

For a latched alarm, themessage will remain untilthe alarm condition isremoved.See also section 7.7.1.

Parameters shown ! canbe adjusted. Forexample, the alarmacknowledge parameter =‘No’ or ’Yes’

Page 129: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-13

7.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters

Table Number:

7-6-1

These parameters indicate alarm status ALARMS

(Summary Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

New Alarm This is a parameteravailable over digitalcommunications to flag thata new alarm has occurred

NoYes

L1 R/O

LP1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop1

No

Yes

L1

LP2 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop2

No

Yes

L1

LP3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop3

No

Yes

L1

PV Input Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with thePV input

No

Yes

L1

An Input Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with theanalogue input

No

Yes

L1

Module 1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 1

No

Yes

L1

Module 3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 3

No

Yes

L1

Module 4 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 4

No

Yes

L1

Module 5 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 5

No

Yes

L1

Module 6 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 6

No

Yes

L1

User 1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User1

No

Yes

L1

User 2 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User

No

Yes

L1

Page 130: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

2

User 3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User3

No

Yes

L1

User 4 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User4

No

Yes

L1

User 5 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User5

No

Yes

L1

User 6 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User6

No

Yes

L1

User 7 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User7

No

Yes

L1

User 8 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User8

No

Yes

L1

Ack All Acknowledges all alarms No

Yes

L3

Page 131: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-15

7.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

A new alarm can be acknowledged in four ways:

1. By pressing and simultaneously2. From an external source, such as a pushbutton, connected to a suitably configured digital

input3. Through digital communications

The message will remain on the screen and the alarm symbol, , will continue to flash until

the alarm is acknowledged - you are prompted to do this by pressing and simultaneously. The symbol will stop flashing and remain illuminated until all alarmconditions are removed. If a further alarm occurs the symbol will start flashing again and anew alarm message will pop up.

The message displayed indicates the source of the alarm and may be customised to the usersterminology. The source will inherit the name of the channel or the loop or the user alarmname.

The operation of the alarm acknowledgement depends whether the alarm is non-latching orlatching, auto or manual reset. This is shown in the following tables:-

Non Latched Alarms

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Off Former display Off

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Alarm message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOn Yes Steady Former display OffOff Off Former message Off

Latched Alarm - Auto

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Flashing Alarm message OnOff Yes

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnON Yes Steady °:Access Level OffOff - Off Normal display Off

Page 132: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Latched Alarm - Manual

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Flashing Alarm message OnOff Yes Off Access Level Off

AlarmCondition

Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)

ON No Flashing Alarm message OnON Yes Steady Former display OffOff - Steady Former display OffOff To acknowledge

see belowOff Former display Off

7.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Note:To acknowledge all alarms scroll to Ack All?

and press or to ‘Yes’

1. From the ALARMS(Summary) page press

or to select thealarm to acknowledge

2. Press to select thealarm

3. Press . or toAck:= Yes

4. To confirm the

acknowledge, press as instructed in the popup window.

If the alarm is latched -manual the alarm cannotbe acknowledged until thealarm condition is removed

If it is latched - Automaticyou can acknowledge atany time but the alarmmessage will onlydisappear when the alarmcondition is removed.

See also &.4

Page 133: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-17

7.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS

The alarm trip level (setpoint) is available in access level 1 and is adjusted by accessing thepage header for the chosen alarm. The hysteresis is available in access level 3. Thefollowing example adjusts these parameters for Alarm 1/Loop 1:

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

3. Press to display thelist of sub-headers

4. Press or toselect the source of thealarm, in this exampleLP1

6. Press or toscroll to ‘Alm1 setpoint’

7. Press to select theAL1 Setpoint

8. Press or toadjust the value

This example sets thealarm trip level to 178units

The alarm type must havebeen selected in configlevel. Otherwise the alarmparameters will not beavailable

Hysteresis defines thedifference between alarmON and alarm OFF value.

This example sets thealarm hysteresis to 1 unit

1. From any display press

as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu

2. Press or toselect ‘ALARMS’

5. Press to display thelist of alarm parametersfor LP1

9. Press to select the‘Alm1 Hyst’

10. Press or toadjust the value

Page 134: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.9. ALARM PARAMETERS

The parameter tables listed in this section are only displayed if an alarm has been configuredfor the particular loop, input or module.

7.9.1. ALARMS ( LP1 Page) ParametersTable Number:

7.9.1.

These parameters set up the Loop 1 alarms ALARMS

(LP1) Page

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Alm1 Type Alarm 1 Type OffFull Scale LowFull ScaleHighDeviationBandDeviation HighDeviation LowRate ofChangeIf TrueIf FalseGoes TrueGoes FalseIf Changed

R/O

Alm1 Setpoint Alarm 1 Setpoint Controllerrange

L1

Alm1 Hyst Alarm 1 hysteresis Controllerrange

L3

Alm1 Output Alarm 1 output OffOn

Off R/O

Alm1 Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit NoYes

No L3

Alm2 Type Alarm 2 Type As Alm1 Type R/O

Alm2 Setpoint Alarm 2 Setpoint Controllerrange

L1

Alm2 Hyst Alarm 2 hysteresis Controllerrange

L3

Alm2 Output Alarm 2 output OffOn

Off R/O

Alm2 Inhibit Alarm 2 inhibit NoYes

No L3

The above table is repeated for LP2 and LP3 if three control loops have been configured.

Page 135: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-19

7.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters

Table Number:

7.9.2.

These parameters set up the alarmsassociated with the PV input signal.

ALARMS

(PV Input Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

PV Alarm Ack Alarm acknowledge for PVinput

NoYes

No L1

FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High Alarm (1)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L3

FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output

Off

On

Off R/O

FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (2)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (2)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L3

FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (2)output

Off

On

Off R/O

Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)

No

Yes

No L3

Page 136: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters

Table Number:

7.9.3.

These parameters set up the alarms associatedwith the analogue input signal.

ALARMS

(An Input Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

An Alm Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor analogue input

NoYes

No L1

FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High alarm (1)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L2

FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output

Off

On

Off R/O

FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (2)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (2)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L3

FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (2)output

Off

On

Off R/O

Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)

No

Yes

No L3

Page 137: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Alarm Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-21

7.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters

Table Number:

7.9.4.

These parameters set up the alarmsassociated with module 1.

ALARMS

(Module 1 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Module 1 Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor module 1

NoYes

No L1

FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High alarm (1)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L2

FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output

Off

On

Off R/O

FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (3)Setpoint

Controllerrange

L1

FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (3)hysteresis

Controllerrange

L3

FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (3)output

Off

On

Off R/O

Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)

No

Yes

No L3

The above table is repeated for:Module 3Module 4Module 5Module 6

Page 138: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Alarm Operation 2704 Controller

7-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

7.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters

Table Number:

7.9.5.

These parameters set up user definedalarms.

ALARMS

(User 1 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Alm1 Type Alarm 1 Type Same as7.9.1.

R/O

User 1 Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor user alarm 1

NoYes

No L1

Latching Indicates if the alarm hasbeen configured as latching

None

Auto

Manual

Event

R/O atL3

Blocking Indicates if the alarm hasbeen configured as blocking

No

Yes

R/O atL3

Setpoint Alarm 1 Setpoint Controllerrange

L1

Hyst Alarm 1 hysteresis Controllerrange

L3

Output Alarm 1 output Off

On

Off R/O atL1

Val A Input A value. Normallyinternally wired to the PV

Disp min todisp max

R/O atL3 wiredto PVsource if

Val B Input B value. Used if theuser alarm is deviation.Normally internally wired tothe SP

Disp min todisp max

R/O atL3 wiredto PVsource if

Inhibit Alarm inhibit No

Yes

No L3

The above table is repeated for:

User alarm 2 User alarm 5User alarm 3 User alarm 6User alarm 4 User alarm 7

User alarm 8

Page 139: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-1

8. CHAPTER 8 TUNING ......................................................... 28.1. WHAT IS TUNING .....................................................................................28.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING .............................................................................38.2.1. One-shot Tuning..........................................................................................38.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1....................................................48.4. CASCADE TUNING ...................................................................................58.4.1. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop.........................................................58.4.2. AutotuneParameters ....................................................................................68.4.3. To View the State of Autotune....................................................................78.5. MANUAL TUNING.....................................................................................88.5.1. Setting the cutback values ...........................................................................98.5.2. Integral action and manual reset................................................................108.5.3. To Manually Set PID Values ....................................................................108.5.4. Valve Position Control..............................................................................108.6. GAIN SCHEDULING................................................................................118.6.1. To Use Gain Scheduling ...........................................................................118.6.2. Analogue Value.........................................................................................12

Page 140: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8. Chapter 8 TuningThis chapter describes how to tune your controller to match the characteristics of the processunder control.There are four topics:• WHAT IS TUNING?

• AUTOMATIC TUNING

• MANUAL TUNING

• GAIN SCHEDULINGThis chapter should be read in conjunction with Chapter 9, Loop Set Up.

8.1. WHAT IS TUNING

In tuning, you match the characteristics of the controller to those of the process beingcontrolled in order to obtain good control. Good control means:

• Stable, ‘straight-line’ control of the PV at setpoint without fluctuation• No overshoot, or undershoot, of the PV setpoint• Quick response to deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances, thereby

rapidly restoring the PV to the setpoint value.

Tuning involves calculating and setting the value of the parameters listed in Table 8-1. Theseparameters appear in the Loop Setup (PID) list, see Chapter 9.

Parameter Meaning or Function

Proportionalband

The bandwidth, in display units or %, over which the output power isproportioned between minimum and maximum.

Integral time Determines the time taken by the controller to remove steady-state errorsignals.

Derivative time Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate-of-change ofthe measured value.

High Cutback The number of display units, above setpoint, at which the controller willincrease the output power, in order to prevent undershoot on cool down.

Low cutback The number of display units, below setpoint, at which the controller willcutback the output power, in order to prevent overshoot on heat up.

Cool gain Only present if cooling has been configured and a module is fitted. Setsthe cooling proportional band, which equals the proportional band valuedivided by the cool gain value.

Table 8-1: Tuning Parameters

Page 141: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-3

8.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING

The 2704 controller uses a one-shot tuner which automatically sets up the initial values of theparameters listed in Table 8-1 on the previous page.

8.2.1. One-shot TuningThe ‘one-shot’ tuner works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in themeasured value. From the amplitude and period of the oscillation, it calculates the tuningparameter values.

If the process cannot tolerate full heating or cooling being applied during tuning, then thelevels can be restricted by setting the autotune high power limit (‘Tune OH’) and autotunelow power limit (‘Tune OL’) in the AUTOTUNE parameters page (Table 8.3.2.). However,the measured value must oscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values.

A One-shot Tune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only onceduring the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under controlsubsequently becomes unstable (because its characteristics have changed), you can re-tuneagain for the new conditions.

It is best to start tuning with the process at ambient conditions and with the SP close to thenormal operating level. This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately the low cutbackand high cutback values which restrict the amount of overshoot, or undershoot.

Page 142: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1

In most cases it will only be necessary to carry out the Autotune procedure whencommissioning your controller.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Set the setpoint to the value at which you will normally operate the process .

1. The controller induces an oscillation in the PV by first turning the output (power) on, andthen off. The first cycle is not complete until the measured value has reached the requiredsetpoint.

2. After two cycles of oscillation the tuning is completed and the tuner switches itself off.

3. When the controller is autotuning the status of autotune is shown periodically on therelevant loop summary

4. The controller then calculates the tuning parameters listed in Table 8-1 and resumesnormal control action.

If you want ‘Proportional only’, ‘PD’, or ‘PI’ control, you should set the Integral timeparameter or derivative time parameter to OFF before commencing the tuning cycle. Theseparameters are found in the Loop Setup (PID) pages, see Chapter 9. The tuner will leavethem off and will not calculate a value for them.

Autotune page is at Level 3by default, but may havebeen promoted to L1 or L2.

The choices are:-LP1LP1ALP1 CascadeThese are repeated forLoops 2 and 3

Note:Text shown in italics is userdefinable in configurationmode and may be differentfrom that shown

1. From any display press

as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu

2. Press or toselect ‘AUTOTUNE’

3. Press to displaysub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Autotune Loop’

5. Press to select theparameter.

6. Press or tochoose the loop to tune

Page 143: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-5

Typical automatic tuning cycle

Calculation of the cutback values

Low cutback and High cutback are values that restrict the amount of overshoot, orundershoot, that occurs during large step changes in PV (for example, under start-upconditions).If either low cutback, or high cutback, is set to ‘Auto’ the values are fixed at three times theproportional band, and are not changed during automatic tuning.

8.4. CASCADE TUNING

In the 2704 controller a cascade loop can be tuned using the autotune feature.

The cascade autotuner tunes to the local setpoint of the auxiliary loop. This value should beset to the value at which the process is typically operated. For example, for a furnacetypically used around 1000oC, set ‘Local SP’ (Aux) to 1000oC. The autotune will take placeat a level below this to ensure that the process operating conditions are not exceeded.

Similarly, since autotune applies the full range of the output signal to the process it may insome cases be desirable to limit this range to protect the process.

Cascade autotune tunes the slave loop first followed by the master. For a more detaileddescription of cascade autotune or tuning of cascade loops manually, see the 2704Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.

8.4.1. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop

1. On the loop overview page, set ‘Local SP’ to the value at which the process typicallyoperates. Alternatively, this value can also be set in the LPx SETUP (SP(Aux)) page.

2. Set ‘Tune OL’ and ‘Tune OH’ (if necessary) to the required limits for the process.These parameters can be found in the AUTOTUNE page.

3. From the AUTOTUNE page header, choose the parameter ‘Autotune Loop’ and select‘LPx (CSD)’.

Cascade control is described in Chapter 9

Time

SetpointPV

Page 144: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8.4.2. AutotuneParameters

Table Number:

8.3.2.

These parameters allow you to autotunethe loop

AUTOTUNE

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Tune OL Auto tune low power limit -100 to100%

0 L1

Tune OH Auto tune high power limit -100 to100%

0 L1

Autotune Loop Selects the loop number totune

LP1LP!ALP1 (CSD)LP2LP2ALP2 (CSD)LP3LP3ALP3 (CSD)

L1

Autotune State Shows the current state ofautotune

Not TuningMeasuringNoiseTuning A atSPTuning to SPFindingMinimumFindingMaximumStoring TimeEndCalculatingPIDABORTED

NotTuning

L1 R/O

Tune OP Tune output -100 to 100 L1

CSD Tune State Cascade tuning state OffInitialisingTuning SlaveWaitingWaiting AgainTuning Master

Off L1

Page 145: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-7

8.4.3. To View the State of AutotuneAs autotune progresses, its state is displayed on the loop overview screen and also in theautoune parameter list as follows.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From the previous display

Press to display‘Autotune State

This parameter displays thestate of Autotuning. Thechoices are:

Not TuningMeasuring NoiseTuning A at SPTuning to SPFinding MinimumFinding MaximumStoring TimeCalculating PID EndABORTED

In the relevant loopsummary, a message belowthe banner is periodicallyflashed with the loop beingtuned. A second messageflashes the state of tuningfrom the text above.

Page 146: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8.5. MANUAL TUNING

If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, you can tune the controllermanually. There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning. The one describedhere is the Ziegler-Nichols method.

With the process at its normal running conditions:

1. Set the Integral Time and the Derivative Time to OFF. 2. Set High Cutback and Low Cutback to ‘Auto’. 3. Ignore the fact that the PV may not settle precisely at the setpoint. 4. If the PV is stable, reduce the proportional band so that the PV just starts to oscillate. If

PV is already oscillating, increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating.Allow enough time between each adjustment for the loop to stabilise. Make a note of theproportional band value ‘B’ and the period of oscillation ‘T’.

5. Set the proportional band, integral time and derivative time parameter values according to

the calculations given in Table 8-2.

Type of control Proportionalband ‘Pb’

Integral time ‘ti’ Derivative time‘td’

Proportional only 2xB OFF OFF

P + I control 2.2xB 0.8xT OFF

P + I + D control 1.7xB 0.5xT 0.12xT

Table 8-2: Tuning Values

Note:-The parameters listed in the above table will be found under the heading Loop Setup. Thisheading is also described in the following chapter.

Page 147: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-9

8.5.1. Setting the cutback valuesThe above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. Ifunacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large stepchanges in PV, then manually set the cutback parameters.

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the low and high cutback values to three proportional bandwidths (that is to say, Lcb= Hcb = 3 x Pb).

2. Note the level of overshoot, or undershoot, that occurs for large PV changes (see thediagrams below).

In example (a) increase Low Cutback by the overshoot value. In example (b) reduce LowCutback by the undershoot value.

Example (a)

Example (b)

Where the PV approaches setpoint from above, you can set High Cutback in a similarmanner.

PV

Time

Setpoint

PV

Undershoot

SetpointOvershoot

Page 148: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8.5.2. Integral action and manual resetIn a full three-term controller (that is, a PID controller), the integral term automaticallyremoves steady state errors from the setpoint. If the controller is set up to work in two-termmode (that is, PD mode), the integral term will be set to ‘OFF’. Under these conditions themeasured value may not settle precisely at setpoint. When the integral term is set to ‘OFF’the parameter manual reset appears in the Loop Setup (PID) page. This parameter representsthe value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. You must set thisvalue manually in order to remove the steady state error.

8.5.3. To Manually Set PID ValuesSee Section 9.2 ‘To Set Up PID Parameters ‘.

8.5.4. Valve Position ControlSee section 9.7 ‘Control of Valve Positioning Motors’, for an explanation of the additionalparameters required for motorised valves and how to set the values of these parameters.

Page 149: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Tuning

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-11

8.6. GAIN SCHEDULING

Gain scheduling is the automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values andanother. In the case of the 2704 controller, this is done at a presettable value of SP, PV Erroror OP. This is determined in configuration level. Gain scheduling is used for the moredifficult to control processes which exhibit large changes in their response time or sensitivityat, for example, high and low PVs, or when heating or cooling.

The 2704 controller has three sets of PID values. You can select the active set from either adigital input, or from a parameter in the Loop Setup(PID) page, see Chapter 9, or you cantransfer automatically in gain scheduling mode. The transfer is bumpless and will not disturbthe process being controlled .

8.6.1. To Use Gain SchedulingIf gain scheduling has been enabled in configuration level:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

You must now set up the three sets of PID values. The values can be manually set, orautomatically tuned as described earlier in this chapter. When tuning automatically you musttune three times, once below the switching point ‘1/2 Boundary’ once between 1/2 Boundary’and ‘2/3 Boundary’ ‘ and finally above ‘2/3 Boundary’.

Alternatives are LP 2 andLP 3. These only appearin the list if the loops areconfigured

LPx SETUP page is atLevel 3 by default but mayhave been promoted to L1or L2.

The choices are PID Sets1 to 3.

To change the active PID

set, press to select,

then press or tochange.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘LP1 SETUP’

3. Press to display sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘PID’

5. Press to show theparameter list.

6. Press again to select‘Active PID Set’ .

7. Press or to selectthe PID set to use for gainscheduling

Page 150: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Tuning 2704 Controller

8-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8.6.2. Analogue Value

The Analogue Value is a customisable parameter available in the PID (and PID Aux) pageswhich provides the user with additional flexibility when designing a control strategy. Thisparameter is called Analogue Value (An Value 1 to 3). It is available for each PID set ifGain Scheduling has been configured and for each loop configured . It can be ‘soft wired’ inconfiguration mode to perform a specific function relevant to the particular process beingcontrolled. Examples include: Output Power Limit, SP Feedforward Trim, etc,.

Page 151: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-1

9. CHAPTER 9 LOOP SET UP............................................... 29.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP ...........................................................................29.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS ..............................................................39.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters ..........................49.2.2. PID Page .....................................................................................................59.2.3. PID (Aux) Page...........................................................................................69.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS................................................79.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page........................................................................89.4. CASCADE CONTROL ...............................................................................99.4.1. Overview.....................................................................................................99.4.2. Simple Cascade...........................................................................................99.4.3. Cascade with Feedforward ..........................................................................99.4.4. Auto/Manual Operation ..............................................................................99.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page) ..................................109.5. RATIO CONTROL ...................................................................................119.5.1. Introduction...............................................................................................119.5.2. Basic Ratio Control...................................................................................119.5.3. Setpoint Tracking......................................................................................129.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page) ..............................129.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL...........................................................................139.6.1. Introduction:..............................................................................................139.6.2. Simple Override ........................................................................................139.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page) ....................149.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS..............................159.7.1. Motor Parameters......................................................................................159.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller.......................................169.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS ........................................................................179.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE).......................................................19

Page 152: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9. Chapter 9 Loop Set Up

9.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP

The 2704 controller can have up to three control loops, and each control loop will have anauxiliary loop if cascade, ratio and override control has been configured. The Loop Setuppages allow you to set up the parameters associated with the operation of each of these loops.The Loop Setup pages are divided into a number of sub-headers - briefly described below:-

LP1 Setup (SP Page) These parameters are associated with the setpoint of aparticular loop

LP1 Setup (SP(Aux)Page) These parameters are associated with the setpoint of theauxiliary loop.

LP1 Setup (Cascade Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for cascade control.

LP1 Setup (Ratio Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for ratio control.

LP1 Setup (Override Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for override control.

LP1 Setup (PID Page) These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PIDvalues for the selected loop. See also Chapter 8

LP1 Setup (PID Aux) Page These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PIDvalues for the selected auxiliary loop. See also Chapter 8

LP1 Setup (Motor Page) These parameters allow you to set up the values for a valvepositioning output when the selected loop is configured formotorised valve control. See also Chapter 8

LP1 Setup (Output Page) These parameters allow you to set up the values for theoutput when the selected loop is configured for analogue ordigital control outputs.

LP1 Setup (DiagnosticPage)

These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selectedloop.

LP1 Setup (Diag Aux) Page These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selectedauxiliary loop.

Each header listed above is repeated for each control loop configured.

Notes:1. Text shown in italics is user definable in configuration mode and may be different from

that shown2. Since this chapter may be read in conjunction with the previous chapter - ‘Tuning’ - the

manual setting of PID parameters is described first.

Page 153: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-3

9.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS

The PID parameters are Proportional Band, Integral Time and Derivative Time. Thevalue of these parameters are dependant upon the characteristics of the application undercontrol. Control stability is also achieved by setting other parameters such as Cutback,Manual Reset, Relative Cool Gain, Feedforward, etc,. Further information is available inChapter 8, Tuning.

For processes where the rate of change varies significantly over the operating range, i.e. non-linear processes, a single set of tuning parameters may not be adequate. The 2704 controllerallows three sets of tuning parameters to be held in memory. Each set can be active atdifferent points in the range to provide best control at different process values. Thesetransition points are set using the parameters 1/2 Boundary and 2/3 Boundary. This is alsoreferred to as Gain Scheduling.

A customisable parameter is available in the PID (and PID Aux) pages which provides theuser with additional flexibility when designing a control strategy. This parameter is calledAnalogue Value (An Value 1 to 3). It is available for each PID set if Gain Scheduling hasbeen configured and for each loop configured . It can be ‘soft wired’ in configuration modeto perform a specific function relevant to the particular process being controlled. Examplesinclude: Output Power Limit, SP Feedforward Trim, etc,.

Page 154: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Alternatives are Loop 2and Loop 3. These onlyappear in the list if theloops are configured.

Available at L3 but mayhave been promoted to L1or L2.

Further parameters may beset up in the same way.These are listed togetherwith an explanation of theirfunction in the followingtable

Note:Text shown in italics is user definable in configurationmode and may be different from that shown

R/O. PID set 1 is onlydisplayed if gainscheduling has beenenabled in configurationlevel.

Shows the working PIDset based upon PV and1/2 & 2/3 boundaries.

The choices are:PID Set 1PID Set 2PID Set 3

The number Following‘Prop Band’ shows thegain set being edited

The proportional band canbe displayed in % or inengineering units, and isadjustable between 1 and9999.9.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘LP1 SETUP’

3. Press to display thesub-headers

4. Press or to selectPID

3. Press to show theparameter list.

4. Press or tochoose ‘Prop Band 1’

5. Press to select PropBand 1

6. Press or to setthe value of theproportional band to bestored in Set 1.

Page 155: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-5

9.2.2. PID Page

Table Number:

9.2.2.

These parameters allow you to set up the PID sets LP1 SETUP

(PID Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Active PID Set The PID set in current use Set 1 to 3 R/O

Prop Band 1 Proportional Band Set 1 1 to 9999.9eng units

L1

Integral 1 Integral Time Set 1 Off to 999.9 L1

Derivative 1 Derivative Time Set 1 secs or mins L1

Cutback Low 1 Cutback Low Set 1 Auto to disp. L1

Cutback High 1 Cutback High Set 1 range L1

Manual Reset 1 Manual Reset Set 1 (onlyapplies to a PD controller)

Off, -99.9 to+100

L1

Cool Gain 1 Relative channel 1/channel2 Gain Set 1 (e.g. cooling).Only present if ch 1 and ch 2are in the same loop

0.1 to 10 L1

An Value 1 Analogue value 1 (see 9.2) L3

The above eight parameters are repeated for set 2 and again for set 3 if the number of PIDsets has been configured to 2 or 3 respectively.

FF Offset Feedforward Offset Value L3

FF Prop Band Feedforward ProportionalBand. This parametercontrols the amount that thePID can affect the output

L3

FF Trim Limit Feedforward Trim Limit L3

Remote FFwd Remote feedforward L3

1/2 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2

Range units L3

2/3 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2

Range units L3

Loop Brk Time Loop break time OffOn

L3

AutoDroop Comp Manual reset when Integralturned off

ManualCalc

L3

Control Hold Control hold flag. Freezesthe control output

NoYes

L3

Integral Hold Integral hold flag No

Yes

L3

Page 156: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.2.3. PID (Aux) Page

Table Number:

9.2.3.

These parameters allow you to set up thePID sets

LP1 SETUP

PID(Aux) Page

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Active PID Set The PID set currently beingused

PID Set 1 to3

L1

Prop Band 1 Proportional Band Set 1 1 to 9999.9eng units

L1

Integral 1 Integral Time Set 1 Off to

999.9 secsor mins

L1

Derivative 1 Derivative Time Set 1 Off to

999.9 secsor mins

L1

Cutback Low 1 Cutback Low Set 1 Auto todisplay limit

L1

Cutback High 1 Cutback High Set 1 Auto todisplay limit

L1

Manual Reset 1 Manual Reset Set 1 (onlyapplies to a PD controller)

Off, -99.9 to+100

L1

Cool Gain 1 Relative channel 1/channel2 Gain Set 1 (e.g. cooling.Only present if ch 1 and ch 2are in the same loop)

0.1 to 10 L1

An Value 1 Analogue value 1 (see 9.2) L3

The above seven parameters are repeated for set 2 and again for set 3 if the number of PIDsets has been configured to 2 or 3 respectively.

1/2 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2

Range units L3

2/3 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2

Range units L3

Control Hold Aux. Control hold flag.Freezes the control output

NoYes

L3

Integral Hold Aux. Integral hold flag No

Yes

L3

The tables in sections 9.2.2 and 9.2.3 are repeated for Loop 2 and Loop 3 if these havebeen configured

This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Ratio.

Page 157: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-7

9.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS

The method of access to parameters associated with setpoints is identical to that alreadydescribed. The list of these parameters is given in the table below:-

Table Number:

9.3.

This list allows you to select the setpoint to use, itsvalue, setpoint limits and trims for the main loop.

LP1 SETUP

(SP Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

SP Select Internal setpoint select Setpoint 1

Setpoint 2

L1

SP1 Low Limit Setpoint 1 low limit L3

SP1 High Limit Setpoint 1 high limit L3

Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1 value L1

SP2 Low Limit Setpoint 2 low limit Rangeunits

L3

SP2 High Limit Setpoint 2 high limit L3

Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2 value L1

Disable Rt Lim Setpoint Rate limit disable No

Yes

L3

Rate Limit Val Rate of change of setpoint Off torangeunits

L3

Trim Lo Lim Local setpoint trim low limit L3

Trim Hi Lim Local setpoint trim high limit Rangeunits

L3

Local SP Trim Allows a trim value to beapplied to the remote SP

L1

Enable Rem SP Remote setpoint enable No

Yes

L1

Remote SP Remote setpoint value Rangeunits

L1

HBk Type SP rate limit holdback type Off

Low

High

Band

L3

HBk Value SP rate limit holdback value Displayrange

R/O

HBk Status SP rate limit holdback status Off

Holdback

L3

Page 158: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page

Table Number:

9.3.1

This list allows you to select the setpoint valueand setpoint limits specific to the auxiliaryloop.

LP1 SETUP

(SP Aux) Page

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

SP Low Limit Auxiliary setpoint 1 low limit Rangeunits

L3

SP High Limit Auxiliary setpoint 1 high limit Rangeunits

L3

OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim Rangeunits

L3. OnlyappearswhenOverridecontrol isconfigured

Local SP The setpoint which thecontroller reverts to whennot in cascade, ratio oroverride

Rangeunits

L1

Working SP The current value of thesetpoint in use

Rangeunits

L1

This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Ratio.

Page 159: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-9

9.4. CASCADE CONTROL

9.4.1. OverviewCascade control is a technique used to enable processes with long time constants to becontrolled with the fastest possible response to process disturbances, including setpointchanges, whilst still minimising the potential for overshoot. It is a combination of two PIDcontrollers, where the output signal from one (the master) forms the setpoint for the other (theslave). For cascade control to be effective the slave loop should be more responsive than themaster.

9.4.2. Simple CascadeThe main process is controlled using the master PID loop, the output of which is used todetermine the setpoint of the slave. The implementation of cascade control in the 2704 isavailable as a standard option. ie ; it is not necessary to order a dual loop controller toperform cascade control.

9.4.3. Cascade with FeedforwardAn available option with cascade control is feedforward. It allows either the master PV,master SP or user defined variable to be fed forward so that it directly influences the slavesetpoint. The master PID output contribution of the slave setpoint is limited by the trim limitset in engineering units. This parameter also adjusts the gain of the feedforward path.A typical application for SP feedforward could be in a heat treatment furnace, where it can beused to extend the life of heating elements by limiting their maximum operating temperature.An application using PV feedforward could be in autoclaves or reactor vessels where it issometimes required to protect the product from excessive temperature gradients (also referredto as Delta T Control).

9.4.3.1. Standard Feedforward

Standard feedforward is used if there is a requirement for some additional parameter, forexample an analogue input, to trim the master PID output value before the slave setpoint isapplied. An application may be a liquid temperature control system using cascade control ofheater temperature where variations in control rate can be directly fed forward into the slaveloop, modifying heater temperature and giving rapid compensation

9.4.4. Auto/Manual OperationAuto/Manual operates on both master and slave loops.When the controller is placed in manual the slave working setpoint will track the value of theslave process value continually, therefore ensuring bumpless transfer.When cascade is deactivated the master loop will monitor the setpoint of the slave loop andprovide a smooth transition of output power when the loop moves back to cascade mode.

Page 160: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Figure 9-1: Cascade with Feedforward

9.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page)

Table Number:

9.4.5.

This list allows you to set upparameters specific to cascadecontrollers

LP1 SETUP

(Cascade Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Disable CSD Cascade disable status Off

On

L1

CSD FF Value Cascade feedforward valuei.e. The value being fedforward

Range ofsignalbeing fedforward

L3

CSD FF Trim Lim Cascade feedforward trimlimit i.e. The amount themaster output can betrimmed up and down.

Range ofslave loop

L3

Master OP Cascade master PID outputpower

Range ofslave loop

R/O

Csd TrimLim

Master PIDLoop

FeedforwardSelection

Slave PIDLoop

ControlOutput

MasterPV

MasterSP

RemoteInput

SlavePV

Csd FFValue

MasterOP

Page 161: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-11

9.5. RATIO CONTROL

9.5.1. IntroductionRatio Control is a technique used to control a process variable at a setpoint which iscalculated as a proportion of a second (lead) input. The ratio setpoint determines theproportion of the lead value that is to be used as the actual control setpoint. The ratio setpointcan be applied as either a multiplier or as a divisor to the second input.A typical application is in gas fired furnaces where in order to achieve efficient combustion,the gas and air flow supplied to the burners needs to be maintained at a constant ratio.

9.5.2. Basic Ratio ControlThe 2704 contains a ratio control function block (function blocks are explained in theEngineering Manual Part No. HAxx) which can be used in any control loop. Figure 9.2shows a block diagram of a simple ratio controller. The lead PV is multiplied or divided bythe ratio setpoint to calculate the desired control setpoint. Prior to the setpoint calculation,the ratio setpoint can be offset by the ratio trim value and must obey the overall ratio setpointoperating limits. Another useful feature of the is the automatic calculation of the actualmeasured ratio which is then available to be displayed on the controller front panel.

Figure 9-2: Simple Ratio Control Block Diagram

Main ControlLoop

Main Process PV

Lead PVZ/^

Ratio SP

Ratio Trim

Ratio SP Limits

Control OP

Local TrimRange Hi

Range Lo

++

Working Ratio SP

Ratio Hi Limit

Ratio Lo Limit

Page 162: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.5.3. Setpoint TrackingWhen the control loop is placed in manual or ratio has been deselected, setpoint tracking canbe used to recalculate the actual achieved ratio, thereby ensuring bumpless transfer betweenmodes. If the input from the lead process value at any time becomes invalid, then theworking setpoint of the loop will remain at its current value

9.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page)

Table Number:

9.5.4.

This list allows you to set up parametersspecific to ratio controllers

LP1 SETUP

(Ratio Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Lead PV The value of the leadprocess variable

L1

Measured Ratio Measured Ratio R/O

Ratio WSP Ratio working setpoint R/O

Ratio Lo Lim Ratio setpoint low limit L3

Ratio Hi Lim Ratio setpoint high limit L3

Ratio SP Ratio setpoint L1

Enable Ratio Ratio enable No

Yes

L1

Ratio Trim Ratio trim value L1

Page 163: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-13

9.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL

9.6.1. Introduction:Override Control allows a secondary control loop to override the main control output in orderto prevent an undesirable operating condition. The override function can be configured tooperate in either minimum, maximum or select mode.A typical example can be implemented in a heat treatment furnace with one thermocoupleattached to the workpiece, and another situated close to the heating elements. Control of thefurnace during the heating up period is regulated by the override (heating element)temperature controller which provides a safeguard against overheating. Control of thefurnace will switch over to the workpiece temperature controller at some point when thetemperature is near to its target setpoint. The exact point of switchover is determinedautomatically by the controller, and will be dependent on the selected PID terms.

9.6.2. Simple OverrideOverride control is available with analogue, time proportioning and ON/OFF control outputs.It is not available with valve position outputs. Figure 9.3 shows a simple override controlloop. The main and override controller outputs are fed to a low signal selector. The overridecontroller setpoint is set to a value somewhere above the normal operating setpoint, butbelow any safety interlocks.There is one Auto Manual switch for both loops. In manual mode the control outputs of bothloops track the actual output therefore ensuring bumpless transfer when auto is selected.

Figure 9-3: Simple Override Control

Min select

Main ControlLoop

OverrideControlLoop

ControlOutput

Main OP

Override OP

Override SP

Main SP

Main PV

Override PV

Page 164: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page)

Table Number:

9.6.3.

This list allows you to set up parametersspecific to override controllers

LP1 SETUP

(Override Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

OVR Target SP Override target setpoint Displayrange

L1

Disable OVR Disable override control No

Yes

L1

Active Loop Displays the loop which iscontrolling at any time

Main Loop

Aux Loop

L1

OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim Rangelimit

L3

Main OP Override main output -100 to100

R/O

Override OP Override output -100 to100

R/O

Page 165: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-15

9.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS

The 2704 controller can be configured for motorised valve control as an alternative to thestandard PID control algorithm. This algorithm is designed specifically for positioningmotorised valves and operates in boundless mode, which does not require a position feedbackpotentiometer for control purposes

An example on how to connect a motorised valve controller is given in Chapter 2 section2.4.2. The control is performed by delivering open, or close, pulses in response to the controldemand signal via raise and lower relay or triac outputs.

The following page will appear if your controller is configured for motorised valve control.

9.7.1. Motor Parameters

Table Number:

9.7.1.

This list allows you to set up the motor interfaceparameters for a valve positioning output. Thispage only appears if a motor valve positioningcontroller is configured

LP1 SETUP

(Motor Page)

ParameterName

Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Travel Time This parameter is set tomatch the time taken for themotor to travel from fullyclosed to fully open

0:00:00.1 0:00:60:0 L3

Inertia This parameter is set tomatch the inertia (if any) ofthe motor

Off to0:00:00.1

0:00:20:0 L3

Backlash This parameter compensatesfor any backlash which mayexist in the linkages

Off to0:00:00.1

0:00:20:0 L3

Min Pulse Time Sets the minimum on time ofthe signal which drives themotor

Auto to0:00:00.1

Auto =0:00:00:2

L3

VP Pot Lo Lim Valve position low limit 0 to Pot Hi L3

VP Pot Hi Lim Valve position high limit 0 to Pot Lo L3

VP SBrk OP Sensor break action forbounded control

0 to 100% L3

VP SBrk Action Sets the sensor break actionfor a valve position controllerwhen no feedbackpotentiometer is used.

Reset

Up

Down

L3

Valve Position Indicates the position of thevalve

0 to 100% R/O

Enable Pot Cal Pot input calibration enable Off On L3

Page 166: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

9.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller

1. Measure the time taken for the valve to be raised from its fully closed to its fully openposition and enter this as the value in seconds into the ‘Travel Time’ parameter.

2. Set all the other parameters to the default values shown in 9.7.1.

The controller can then be tuned using any of the automatic, or manual, tuning proceduresdescribed in Chapter 8. As before, the tuning process, either automatic or manual, involvessetting the values of the parameters in Table 9.7.1. The only difference with boundlesscontrol is that the derivative term, although present, will have no effect.

9.7.2.1. Adjusting the minimum pulse-time

The default value of 0.2 seconds is satisfactory for most processes. If, however, after tuningthe process, the valve activity is excessively high, with constant oscillation between raise andlower pulses, the minimum on-time can be increased.

The minimum on-time determines how accurately the valve can be positioned and thereforethe control accuracy. The shorter the time, the more precise the control. However, if thetime is set too short, process noise will cause an excessively busy valve.

9.7.2.2. Inertia and backlash settings

The default values are satisfactory for most processes, i.e. ‘Off’.

Inertia is the time taken for the valve to stop after the output pulse is turned off. If thiscauses a control problem, the inertia time needs to be determined and then entered into the‘Inertia’ parameter. The inertia time is subtracted from the raise and lower output pulsetimes, so that the valve moves the correct distance for each pulse.

Backlash is the output pulse time required to reverse the direction of the valve, i.e. the timetaken to overcome the mechanical backlash of the linkages. If the backlash is sufficient tocause a control problem, then the backlash time needs to be determined and then entered intothe ‘Backlash’ parameter.

The above two values are not part of the automatic tuning procedure and must be enteredmanually.

Page 167: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-17

9.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS

Table Number:

9.8.

This list allows you to set up the parameterswhich control the control output to the plant

LP1 SETUP

(Output Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Loop Mode On/Off control output only.Allows the controller to beswitched into manual

Auto

Manual

Auto L1

OP Low Limit Sets a low limit on ananalogue output signal

-100% to100%

L3

OP High Limit Sets a high limit on ananalogue output signal

-100% to100%

L3

OP Rate Limit Sets the rate at which theoutput value changes

Off to99.99%/sec

L3

OP Rate Lim En Output rate limit enable Off

On

Off L3

Forced OP Sets the output value whenthe controller is switched tomanual - alternative tobumpless transfer

-100% to100%

L3

SBrk OP Sets the level of the outputunder sensor breakconditions

-100% to100%

L3

CH1 OP Reads the current value ofchannel 1 output

-100% to100%

R/O

Ch1 Hysteresis Only shown if the outputrelay 1 is configured ason/off. It sets the differencebetween relay on and relayoff.

Off to9999.9

L3

Ch1 Min Pulse Output minimum on time(on/off control)

The above three parameters are repeated for channel 2

Deadband Deadband between ch1 andch2 - only applies if both ch1and ch2 are configured

Off to100.0

L3

Target OP Target output power -100 to100%

L1

Rem Lo OP Lim Remote low power limit -100% to100%

L3

Rem Hi OP Lim Remote high power limit -100% to100%

L3

Page 168: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Power FF Val Power feedforward

Only shown when powerfeedforward is enabled inconfig level. It provides ameasure of the valueapplied to the outputdemand to compensate forsupply voltage variations

R/O

Ena OP Track Output track enable No

Yes

L3

OP Track Value Track input -100 to100

L3

Ena Aux OP Trk Auxiliary Output track enable No

Yes

L3

Aux OP Trk Val Auxiliary Track input -100 to100

L3

Page 169: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Loop Set Up

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-19

9.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE)

This page is read only and provides information on the current operating conditions of thecontrol loop. It is used for diagnostic purposes.

Table Number:

9.9.

This list allows you to interrogateoperating conditions of the loop

LP 1 SETUP

(Diagnostic ,Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

PV Process Variable Displayrange

L1

Aux PV Auxiliary Process Variable Displayrange

L1

Working SP The value of the workingsetpoint

Displayrange

L1

Working OP The value of the workingoutput

-100 to100

L1

Error Value of main loop error

(PV - SP) or (SP-PV)

Displayrange

L1

Aux Error Value of the auxiliary looperror (PV - SP) or (SP-PV)

-9999 to9999

R/O

P OP Proportional component ofthe output

-999 to9999

R/O

Aux P OP Proportional component ofthe auxiliary loop output

-999 to9999

R/O

I OP Integral component of theoutput

-999 to9999

R/O

Aux I OP Integral component of theauxiliary loop output

-999 to9999

R/O

D OP Derivative component of theoutput

-999 to9999

R/O

Aux D OP Derivative component of theauxiliary loop output

-999 to9999

R/O

FF OP Feedforward component ofoutput

-9999 to9999

R/O

SRL Complete Setpoint rate limit complete R/O

VP Velocity VP output velocity -100 to100

R/O

Loop Brk Stat Loop break status flag No

Yes

R/O

Page 170: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Loop Set Up 2704 Controller

9-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Ext FBack External feedback ExtFb LoLim toExtFbHigh Lim

L3

Aux Fback Auxiliary external feedback Pwr LowLim to PwrHigh Lim

L3

Page 171: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-1

10. CHAPTER 10 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS............... 210.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL ...............................310.1.1. Temperature Control .................................................................................310.1.2. Carbon Potential Control ..........................................................................310.1.3. Sooting Alarm...........................................................................................310.1.4. Automatic Probe Cleaning ........................................................................310.1.5. Enriching Gas Correction..........................................................................310.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring......................................410.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS........................510.2.1. Zirconia Parameters ..................................................................................610.3. HUMIDITYCONTROL ............................................................................810.3.1. Overview...................................................................................................810.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring..................................................910.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber ............................1010.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber..................................1010.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS.....................1110.4.1. Humidity Parameters...............................................................................12

Page 172: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10. Chapter 10 Controller ApplicationsThe 2704 controller contains control blocks specifically designed to suit a number ofdifferent applications.Examples are:-Carbon Potential, Oxygen or Dew Point control using Zirconia probesHumidity control using wet and dry platinum resistance thermometers

About this chapter

This chapter gives general descriptions (which are not intended to be of a particularinstallation) of the use of the 2704 controller in the above applications.

◊ Brief description and terminology applications using zirconia probes

◊ An example wiring diagram for carbon potential control

◊ Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a carbon potential controller

◊ Brief description of humidity control

◊ An example wiring diagram for humidity control

◊ Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a humidity controller

Page 173: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-3

10.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL

A dual loop 2704 controller is required to control temperature of the process on one loop andcarbon potential on the other. The controller is often a programmer which generatestemperature and carbon potential profiles synchronised to a common timebase. In thissection it is assumed that a programmer is used.

10.1.1. Temperature ControlThe sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is commonfor a separate thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating output which maybe connected to gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements. In someapplications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.

10.1.2. Carbon Potential ControlThe zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations onthe reference side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace.The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actualpercentage of carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two outputs. One outputis connected to a valve which controls the amount of an enrichment gas is supplied to thefurnace. The second output controls the level of dilution air.

10.1.3. Sooting AlarmIn addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller (see also Chapter 7‘Alarm Operation’), the 2704 can trigger an alarm when the atmospheric conditions are suchthat carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace.

10.1.4. Automatic Probe CleaningThe 2704 has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur betweenbatches or manually requested. A short blast of compressed air is used to remove any sootand other particles that may have accumulated on the probe. Once the cleaning has beencompleted the time taken for the probe to recover is measured. If the recovery time is toolong this indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. Duringthe cleaning and recovery cycle, the %C reading is frozen thereby ensuring continuousfurnace operation.

10.1.5. Enriching Gas CorrectionA gas analyser may be used to determine the CO concentration of the enriching gas. If a 4-20mA output is available from the analyser, it can be fed into the 2704 to automaticallyadjust the calculated % carbon reading. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.

Page 174: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring

In the above example the following modules are fitted. This will change from installation toinstallation:

Module 1 Dual triac or relay to drive motorised valveModule 3 Dual PV Input ModuleStandard Digital I/O Used as logic input for manual probe clean and outputs for

solenoid valve drivesStandard PV Input For the temperature control thermocouple inputStandard Analogue Input For gas analyserStandard Relay Output For sooting alarm

Figure 10-1: An Example of 2704 Wiring for Carbon Potential Control

Zirconia probethermocouple

N

L

BB

BA

BC

2D

2B

2A

2C

1D

1B

1A

1C

HF

HD

HE

JF

JD

JE

D8

E2

E1

AC

AA

AB

HB

HA

HC

JB

JA

JC

D5

D4

D3

D1

DC

D2

D7

D6

V-

V1

VH

V+

6D

6C

6B

6A

5D

5C

5B

5A

4D

4C

4B

4A

3B

3A

3C

3D+

-

ZirconiaVolt

Source

+

-

Motorised ValveProbe CleanDemand

SootingAlarm

EnrichmentGas

DilutionAir

Temperaturecontrol

thermocouple

GasAnalyser

Powersupply

Power supply forvalve drive

CoolingSolenoid

+

-

Note: The +veof the voltsource must beconnected tothe -ve of thethermocouple

Page 175: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-5

10.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

This selects the pageheader which contains thezirconia parameters

3. Press to display theparameter list

Read only display ofZirconia Control ProcessValue.

7. Repeat this procedure for all Zirconia parameters .

The full list of parameters available under this list header is shown in the following table

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘ZIRCONIA PROBE’

4. Press or to scrollto the required parameter inthe list

5. Press to select theparameter

6. Press or to changethe value

Page 176: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10.2.1. Zirconia Parameters

Table Number:

10.2.1.

This table allows you to view or adjustzirconia probe parameters

ZIRCONIA PROBE

(Options Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Zirconia Value Zirconia control processvalue

The O2 or dew point valuederived from temperatureand remote gas referenceinputs

Range units R/O

H-CO Reference Gas reference 0.0 to 999.0 20.0 L3

Rem Gas Ref IP Remote gas reference 0.0 to 999.0 L3

Enable Rm H-CO Remote gas enable.

This can be an internalvalue from the user interfaceor remote from an externalsource.

InternalRemote

Internal L3

Working H-CO Working gas reference orprocess factor

0.0 to 999.0 L3 R/O

Process Factor Process Factor is used insome zirconia probes toprovide compensation forthe varying abilities ofdifferent alloys to absorbcarbon.

0.0 to 999.0 L3

Clean Mode Zirconia clean probe input OffOn

Off L3

Clean Freq Zirconia probe cleaninginterval

Off to99:54:00.0

4:00:00:0

L3

Clean Duration Sets the cleaning time 0:00:06.0 to1:39:54.0

0:10:00:0

L3

Max Recvy Time Maximum recovery timeafter purging

0:00:06.0 to0:10:00

0:10:00:0

L3

Min Recvy Time Minimum recovery time afterpurging

Off to 0:00:01to 0:10:00

0:10:00:0

L3

Min Cal Temp Minimum calculation temp.

Sets the minimumtemperature at which thecalculation takes place

-999.0 L3

Probe Offset Zirconia mV offset to 0.0 L3

Temp Offset Sets the temperature offset 2000.0 0.0 L3

Page 177: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-7

for the probe

Next Clean Time to next cleaning.(counts down to 0:00:00.0)

0:00:00.1 R/O

Clean State The burn off state of thezirconia probe

InactiveCleaningRecovering

R/O

Clean Output Clean valve output.This is a signal to thepurging air valve during thepurging cycle.

OffOn (when‘Clean State =Cleaning)

Off L3

Probe Status Probe requires cleaning GoodBad

L1

Probe SBrk Probe sensor break NoYes

R/O

Sooting Alarm Probe sooting alarm output GoodBad

R/O

Probe IP Zirconia probe mV input -0.100 to2.000

R/O

Temp IP Zirconia probe temp inputval

Temp range R/O

PV Invalid PV Invalid

This is a boolean which istrue when the temperature isbelow that set by ‘Min CalTemp’.

It may have been wired inconfiguration mode, forexample, to disable the gasvalve

No

Yes

L3

PV Frozen PV Frozen

This is a boolean whichfreezes the PV during apurging cycle.

It may have been wired inconfiguration mode, forexample, to disable controloutput during purging

No

Yes

L3

Page 178: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10.3. HUMIDITY CONTROL

10.3.1. OverviewHumidity (and altitude) control is a standard feature of the 2704 controller. In theseapplications the controller may be configured to generate a setpoint profile (see Chapter 6‘Programmer Operation’).Also the controller may be configured to measure humidity using either the traditionalWet/Dry bulb method (figure 10.2) or it may be interfaced to a solid state sensor.The controller output may be configured to turn a refrigeration compressor on and off,operate a bypass valve, and possibly operate two stages of heating and/or cooling

Figure 10-2: Humidity Control Block

Humidity ControlBlock

Wet RTD

Dry RTD

Wet Bulb Offset

Altitude Compensation

Psychometric Constant

%RH

Sensor Failure

Dew Point

Page 179: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-9

10.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring

In the above example the following modules are fitted. This will change from installation toinstallation:

Module 1 Analogue or relay to drive dehumidify valveModule 3 PV input module for wet bulb temperature RTDStandard Digital I/O Used as logic outputs for humidify solenoid valve and

temperature control SCRStandard PV Input For the dry bulb RTD used for the temperature control and

humidity calculation

Figure 10-3: Example of Humidity Controller Connections

N

L

BB

BA

BC

2D

2B

2A

2C

1D

1B

1A

1C

HF

HD

HE

JF

JD

JE

D8

E2

E1

AC

AA

AB

HB

HA

HC

JB

JA

JC

D5

D4

D3

D1

DC

D2

D7

D6

V-

V1

VH

V+

6D

6C

6B

6A

5D

5C

5B

5A

4D

4C

4B

4A

3B

3A

3C

3D

Dehumidifyvalve

Dry bulbtemp

HumidifySolenoid

Wet bulbtemp

L

NSCR for

temperaturecontrol

PSU

Drive capability ofdigital outputs 1.5mAusing the internalpower supply or 40mAwith an external supply

Page 180: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental ChamberThe temperature of an environmental chamber is controlled as a single loop with two controloutputs. The heating output time proportions electric heaters, usually via a solid state relay.The cooling output operates a refrigerant valve which introduces cooling into the chamber.The controller automatically calculates when heating or cooling is required.

10.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental ChamberHumidity in a chamber is controlled by adding or removing water vapour. Like thetemperature control loop two control outputs are required, i.e. Humidify and Dehumidify.To humidify the chamber water vapour may be added by a boiler, an evaporating pan or bydirect injection of atomised water.If a boiler is being used adding steam increases the humidity level. The humidify outputfrom the controller regulates the amount of steam from the boiler that is allowed into thechamber.An evaporating pan is a pan of water warmed by a heater. The humidify output from thecontroller humidity regulates the temperature of the water.An atomisation system uses compressed air to spray water vapour directly into the chamber.The humidify output of the controller turns on or off a solenoid valve.Dehumidification may be accomplished by using the same compressor used for cooling thechamber. The dehumidify output from the controller may control a separate control valveconnected to a set of heat exchanger coils.

Page 181: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Controller Applications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-11

10.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERSDo This This Is The Display You

Should SeeAdditional Notes

This selects the pageheader which contains thehumidity parameters

7. Repeat this procedure for all Humidity parameters .

The full list of parameters available under this list header is shown in the following table

Read only display of DewPoint

4. Press or to scrollto the required parameter inthe list

5. Press to select theparameter

6. Press or to changethe value

3. Press to display theparameter list

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘HUMIDITY’

Page 182: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Controller Applications 2704 Controller

10-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

10.4.1. Humidity Parameters

Table Number:

10.4.1.

These parameters allow you to view or adjustthe parameters for humidity control

HUMIDITY

(Options)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Dew Point Wet/Dry temperaturemeasurement of dew point

-999.9 to999.9

L1

R/O

Rel Humidity Relative Humidity 0.0 to 100.0 L1

R/O

Resolution Display resolution XXXXX

XXXX.X

XXX.XX

XX.XXX

X.XXXX

L3

Atm Pressure Atmospheric Pressure 0.0 to 2000.0 1013

mbar

L3

PMetric Const Psychometric Constant 0.0 to 10.0 6.66 L3

Wet Bulb Offs Wet bulb temperaturecorrection

-100.0 to100.0

0.0 L3

Humidity SBrk Sensor break action forhumidity control

No

Yes

L1

Dry Bulb Temp Dry Bulb Temperature Range units L1 R/O

Wet Bulb Temp Wet Bulb Temperature Range units L1 R/O

Page 183: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-1

11. CHAPTER 11 INPUT OPERATORS................................. 211.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS.........................................................211.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION...................................................................311.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1.................................................................411.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters .....................................611.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Non-Linearities ................................................711.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING ...............................811.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points.............................911.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters ................................................1011.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR) ................................1111.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters ........................................................1111.5. BCD INPUT..............................................................................................1211.5.1. Main Features..........................................................................................12

Page 184: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11. Chapter 11 Input Operators

11.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS

The 2704 controller can have three control loops. Each loop can be independentlyconfigured to the process to be controlled. This has been described in Chapters 9 and 10 forPID, Cascade, Ratio, Override, Humidity Control, etc. It is also possible to apply customlinearisation to the inputs of each loop. This is a 16 point straight line linearisation and theparameters can be made available at Levels 1, 2 and 3 so that scaling can be carried outduring commissioning.Custom linearisation is achieved under three page headers in the controller.

Also included in this section are parameters which allow you to switch inputs betweendifferent thermocouple types or between a thermocouple and pyrometer when the process is ahigh temperature furnace.

The page headers are:

INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 1Page)

These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 1

INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 2Page)

These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 2

INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 3Page)

These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 3

INPUT OPERS (Switch 1Page)

These parameters provide switch over betweenthermocouple types or pyrometer

INPUT OPERS (Monitor 1Page)

Logs maximum and minimum, counts time abovethreshold

BCD INPUT To select a numerical value from an external BCDswitch

The Input Operators page is only available if Input Operators has been enabled inconfiguration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.

Note:In addition to linearising the controller inputs channels, it is equally valid to customise othersources such as Output Channels. This allows you, for example, to compensate for non linearcontrol valve characteristics.

Page 185: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-3

11.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION

The linearisation uses a 16 point straight line fit.Figure 11.1 shows an example of a curve to be linearised and is used to illustrate theterminology used for the parameters found in the INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin1 Page).

Figure 11-1: Linearisation Example

Notes:

1. The linearisation block works on rising inputs/rising outputs or rising inputs/fallingoutputs. It is not suitable for outputs which rise and fall on the same curve.

2. Input Lo/Output Lo and Input Hi/Output Hi are entered first to define the low and highpoints of the curve. It is not necessary to define all 15 intermediate points if the accuracyis not required. Points not defined will be ignored and a straight line fit will applybetween the last point defined and the Input Hi/Output Hi point.

Output Hi

Output Lo

Output 2( to 15)

Input HiInput Lo Input 2( to 15)

Ignored datapoints

Terminatedsearch

Page 186: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

To select the Input (orOutput) to linearise

7. Press to selectInput Value

Displays the Current inputvalue. Access level 1

8. Press to selectOutput Value

Displays the Current Outputvalue. Access level 1

This enables customlinearisation

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press to show theparameter list

5. Press to select ‘Enable’

6. Press or to ‘On’

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘INPUT OPERS’

INPUT OPERS is onlyshown if it has beenenabled in configurationlevel.

Page 187: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-5

14. Repeat the above two steps to set the high points then continue for as many intermediatepoints as required

10. Press to select InputLo

11. Press or to set theminimum input value

12. Press to select OutputLo

13. Press or to set theoutput value whichcorresponds to the Input Lovalue

This is the value read by thesensor. Access level 3

This is the displayed value

The following table gives the full list ofparameters available in this list

9. Press to selectOutput Status

Good The input isgood and inrange

Bad If the input isbad or out ofrange the outputvalue is bad

Page 188: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters

Table Number:

11.2.2.

This page allows you to set up a customisedlinearisation curve

INPUT OPERS(Cust Lin 1)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Enable To enable customlinearisation

OffOn

Off L3

Input Value The current value of theinput

Range R/O

Output Value The current value of theoutput

Range R/O

Output Status The conditions are OK

The conditions are bad orout of range

Good

Bad

R/O

Input Lo Adjust to the low input value Range L3

Output Lo Adjust to correspond to thelow input value

Range L3

Input Hi Adjust to the high inputvalue

Range L3

Output Hi Adjust to correspond to thehigh input value

Range L3

Input 2 Adjust to the first break point Range L1

Output 2 Adjust to correspond to input2

Range L1

The above two parameters are repeated for all intermediate break points, ie 2 to 14

Input 15 Adjust to the last break point Range L1

Output 15 Adjust to correspond to input15

Range L1

The above table is repeated for:• INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 2 Page)• INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 3 Page)

Page 189: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-7

Output Hieg 1000oC

Output Loeg 0oC

Output 2( to 15)

Input Hieg 1000oC

Input Loeg 0oC

Input 2( to 15)

Cal Point 6

Cal Point 5

Cal Point 4Cal Point 3

Cal Point 2

Cal Point 1

11.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Non-LinearitiesThe custom linearisation feature can also be used to compensate for errors in the sensor ormeasurement system. The intermediate points are, therefore, available in Level 1 so thatknown discontinuities in the curve can be calibrated out. Figure 11.2 shows an example ofthe type of discontinuity which can occur in the linearisation of a temperature sensor.

Figure 11-2: Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities

The calibration of the sensor uses the same procedure as described above. Adjust the output(displayed) value against the corresponding input value to compensate for any errors in thestandard linearisation of the sensor.

Page 190: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING

This facility is commonly used in wide range temperature applications where it is necessaryto control accurately over the range. A thermocouple may be used to control at lowertemperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high temperatures. Alternatively twothermocouples of different types may be used.

Figure 11-3 shows a process heating over time with boundaries which define the switchingpoints between the two devices. The higher boundary (2 to 3) is normally set towards the topend of the thermocouple range and the lower boundary (1 to 2) set towards the lower end ofthe pyrometer (or second thermocouple) range. The controller calculates a smooth transitionbetween the two devices.

Figure 11-3: Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching

Input 2High temperaturethermocouple orpyrometer

Input 1Low temperaturethermocouple

2704Temperature

controller

Boundary 2/3

Boundary 1/2

S

Temperature

Time T

S

Controller operates entirelyon the higher temperaturedevice

Controller operates entirelyon the lower temperaturedevice

U

RController operates on acombination of both devices

Page 191: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-9

11.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

5. Press to show theparameter list

6. Press again to select‘Switch Lo’

7. Press or tochange the value

The Process Value usedby the controller is derivedfrom Input 1when it isbelow the value set on thedisplay

8. Press to selectSwitch Hi

9. Press or tochange the value

The Process Value usedby the controller is derivedfrom Input 2 when it isabove the value set on thedisplay.

The transition betweenInput 1 and Input 2 isdetermined by the SwitchOver algorithm

The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this list header

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toscroll to ‘Switch 1’

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘INPUT OPERS’

Page 192: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters

Table Number:

11.3.2.

This page allows you to set up and inspectSwitch Over parameters

INPUT OPERS

(Switch 1 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Switch Lo PV = Input 1 below thisvalue

Can be adjusted up to thelimit set by ‘Input Lo’ inconfiguration level or thelimit set by ‘Switch Hi’

Display Range L3

Switch Hi PV = Input 2 above thisvalue

Can be adjusted up to thelimit set by ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level or thelimit set by ‘Switch Lo’

Display Range L3

Output Value The current working value Display Range R/O

Output Status The conditions are OK

The conditions are bad orout of range

Good

Bad

R/O

Input 1 Value The current working value

Can be adjusted betweenthe limits set by ‘Input Lo’and ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level

Display Range R/O

Input 1 Status The conditions are correct

The conditions are bad orout of range

Good

Bad

R/O

Input 2 Value The current working value

Can be adjusted betweenthe limits set by ‘Input Lo’and ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level

Display Range R/O

Input 2 Status The conditions are correct

The conditions are bad orout of range

Good

Bad

R/O

Page 193: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Input Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-11

11.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR)

The Monitor block:

1. Logs the Maximum and Minimum excursions of the PV. These values are reset when:-a) An external logic input, configured as reset, is enabledb) The reset parameter, see Table 11.4.1, is changed to Yes

2. Counts the time above a threshold3. Provides a time alarm

11.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters

Table Number:

11.4.1.

This page allows you to set up Monitorparameters. The values will only berecorded if the function has been enabled inconfiguration level.

INPUT OPERS(Monitor 1 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Input Input value Range L1

Reset Reset No = to run

Yes = to reset

No L3

Maximum The maximum valuerecorded by the controllerbetween resets, see 1.above

Range R/O

Minimum The minimum valuerecorded by the controllerbetween resets, see 1.above

Range R/O

Trigger PV threshold for the timerlog

Range L3

Day Days above threshold 0 to 32767 R/O

Time Time above threshold 0:00:00.0 R/O

Day Alarm This sets the alarmthreshold for the number ofdays that the alarm is active

0 to 32767 L3

Time Alarm This sets the alarmthreshold for the time thatthe alarm is active

0:00:00.0 L3

Alarm Output Displays an alarm when thenumber of days and timehas been exceeded

Off

On

R/O

The above parameters are viewed and altered using the same procedure as Section 11.3.1.

Page 194: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Input Operators 2704 Controller

11-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11.5. BCD INPUT

An available option with the 2704 is the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) function block. Thisfeature is normally used to select a program number by using panel mounted BCD decadeswitches.

11.5.1. Main FeaturesCalculation of BCD Value: The function calculates a BCD value dependant upon the stateof the inputs. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as a wireableparameter.

Calculation of BCD Value: The function calculates a decimal value dependant upon thestate of the inputs. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as awireable parameter.

Digit 1 Output: The function calculates the first decade BCD value dependant on the stateof inputs 1 to 4. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as a wireableparameter.

Digit 2 Output: The function calculates the second decade BCD value dependant on thestate of inputs 5 to 8. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as awireable parameter.

2nd Decade 1st Decade BCD Decimal 2nd Digit 1st Digit0011 1001 39 57 3 90010 0110 26 38 2 6

Table Number:

11.5.

This page allows you to view the BCD inputvalues

INPUT OPERS

(BCD Input Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

BCD Value Reads the value (in decimal)of the switch as it appearson the digital inputs

0-99 R/O

Decimal Value Reads the value of theswitch as it appears on thedigital inputs

0-255 R/O

Digit 1(Units) Units value of the first switch 0-9 R/O

Digit 2(Tens) Tens value of the secondswitch

0-9 R/O

Page 195: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-1

12. CHAPTER 12 TOTALISER, TIMER, CLOCK, COUNTEROPERATION............................................................................. 2

12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS?..............................................................212.2. TIMER TYPES ..........................................................................................412.2.1. On Pulse Timer Mode...............................................................................412.2.2. Off Delay Timer Mode..............................................................................512.2.3. One Shot Timer Mode...............................................................................612.2.4. Minimum On Timer Mode........................................................................712.3. TIMER BLOCKS ......................................................................................812.3.1. Timer Parameters ......................................................................................812.4. THE CLOCK .............................................................................................912.5. TIME BASED ALARMS ........................................................................1012.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters .........................................................................1112.6. TOTALISERS ..........................................................................................1212.6.1. Totaliser Parameters................................................................................13

Page 196: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12. Chapter 12 Totaliser, Timer, Clock, CounterOperation

12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS?

Timer Blocks allow the controller to use time/date information as part of the control process.They can be triggered by an event and used to initiate an action. For example, a programmercan be set to RUN at a particular day and time or an action delayed as a result of a digitalinput signal. The Timer Blocks page is only available if Timer Blocks has been enabled inconfiguration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.

The Timer Blocks fitted in the 2704 controller are:

Four timer blocks Timer blocks can have four modes of operation which areexplained in Section 12.2. The timer type will have been set inConfiguration level. The timer will be activated by an event. Theevent will also have been defined in Configuration mode or itmay be triggered by a parameter in the list. Timing continues fora set time period. This output can be ‘wired’ in configurationmode to operate an event.Configuration of Timer function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933

Clock This is a real time clock which can be used to operate other timebased functions.

Two alarm (clock)blocks

Alarms can be switched on or off at a particular day or time andprovide a digital output. This output can be wired inconfiguration mode to operate an event.Configuration of Timer Alarm function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933

Four totaliser blocks Totaliser blocks can also be ‘wired’, in Configuration level, toany parameter. They are used to provide a running total of aparameter and give an output when a pre-set total is reached. Anexample might be to totalise the flow through a pipe. The outputcan also be ‘wired’ in Configuration level to operate an eventsuch as a relay.Configuration of Totaliser function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933

Page 197: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-3

Timer Blocks are grouped under page headers as follows:

Timer 1 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 1

Timer 2 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 2

Timer 3 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 3

Timer 4 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 4

Clock Page To read set time

Alarm 1 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm andread the alarm output condition for alarm 1

Alarm 2 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm andread the alarm output condition for alarm 2

Totaliser1 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.

Totaliser2 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.

Totaliser3 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.

Totaliser4 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.

TIMER BLOCKS

Page 198: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12.2. TIMER TYPES

Each timer block can be configured to operate in four different modes. These modes areexplained below

12.2.1. On Pulse Timer ModeThis timer is used to generate a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger.

• The output is set to On when the input changes from Off to On.

• The output remains On until the time has elapsed

• If the ‘Trigger’ input parameter recurs while the Output is On, the Elapsed Time will resetto zero and the Output will remain On

• The triggered variable will follow the state of the output

Figure 12.1 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.

Figure 12-1: On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions

Input

Output

Elapsed Time

Triggered

Time Time

Input

Output

Elapsed Time

Triggered

Time

Input Interval >Ti

Page 199: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-5

12.2.2. Off Delay Timer ModeThis timer provides a delay between the trigger event and the Timer output. If a short pulsetriggers the Timer, then a pulse of one sample time (110mS) will be generated after the delaytime.

• The Output is set to Off when the Input changes from Off to On.

• The Output remains Off until the Time has elapsed.

• If the Input returns to Off before the time has elapsed, the Timer will continue until theElapsed Time equals the Time. It will then generate a pulse of one Sample Timeduration.

• Once the Time has elapsed, the Output will be set to On.

• The Output will remain On until the Input is cleared to Off.

• The Triggered variable will be set to On by the Input changing from Off to On. It willremain On until both the Time has elapsed and the Output has reset to Off.

Figure 12.2 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.

Figure 12-2: Off Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions

Input

Output

Elapsed Time

Triggered

Time Time

110mS

Page 200: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12.2.3. One Shot Timer ModeThis timer behaves like a simple oven timer.• When the Time is edited to a non-zero value the Output is set to On

• The Time value is decremented until it reaches zero. The Output is then cleared to Off

• The Time value can be edited at any point to increase or decrease the duration of the Ontime

• Once set to zero, the Time is not reset to a previous value, it must be edited by theoperator to start the next On-Time

• The Input is used to gate the Output. If the Input is set, the time will count down to zero.If the Input is cleared to Off, then the Time will hold and the Output will switch Off untilthe Input is next set.

Note: since the Input is a digital wire, it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it, andset the Input value to On which permanently enables the timer.

• The Triggered variable will be set to On as soon as the Time is edited. It will reset whenthe Output is cleared to Off.

Figure 12.3 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.

Figure 12-3: One Shot Timer

Input

Output

Elapsed Time

Triggered

Time

Time Edited

Time

Time

Time Edited

Input

OutputA DCB

Time Edited A+B+C+D =

This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold

Page 201: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-7

12.2.4. Minimum On Timer ModeThis timer has been targeted at guaranteeing that the output remains On for a duration afterthe input signal has been removed. It may be used, for example, to ensure that a compressoris not cycled excessively.

• The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On.

• When the Input changes from On to Off, the elapsed time will start incrementing towardsthe set Time.

• The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time. The Outputwill then switch Off.

• If the Input signal returns to On while the Output is On, the elapsed time will reset to 0,ready to begin incrementing when the Input switches Off.

• The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is >0. It will indicate that thetimer is counting.

Figure 12.4 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.

Figure 12-4: Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions

Input

Output

Elapsed Time

Triggered

TimeTime

Page 202: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12.3. TIMER BLOCKS

To set the time on one of the four timer blocks:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

12.3.1. Timer Parameters

Table Number:

12.2.1.

This page allows you to set up TimerParameters

TIMER BLOCKS(Timer 1 to 4 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default

AccessLevel

Time Timer Time 0:00:00.0 L1

Input Trigger/Gate input. Turn Onto start timing

OffOn

Off L1

Triggered Timer triggered (timing) OffOn

R/O

Output Timer output. Occurs whenthe timer has timed out

Off

On

Off L1

Elapsed Time Timer elapsed time 0:00:00.0 R/O

Displays and allows thetime period to be set inTimer block 1

The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under this listheader

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Timer 1 (to 4)’

5. Press to show theParameter List

6. Press again to select‘Time’

7. Press or to setthe time period

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘TIMER BLOCKS’

Page 203: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-9

12.4. THE CLOCK

The clock is used as a reference for time based alarms. The time and day is set inconfiguration mode as described in the Engineering manual, Part Number HA026933. Inaccess levels 1 to 3 the time can be read as follows:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Displays the set time

Displays the set day

5. Press to show theParameter List

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘TIMER BLOCKS’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Clock’

Page 204: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12.5. TIME BASED ALARMS

There are two alarms available which allow an output to be turned on or off at a set time andday.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Selects the day to turn thealarm on. The choicesare:Never, Monday, Tuesday,Wednesday, Thursday,Friday, Saturday, Sunday,Mon-Fri, Mon-Sat, Sat-Sun Every Day

5. Press to select ‘OnDay’

6. Press or to setthe day to turn the alarmon.

Selects the time of day toturn the alarm on.

9. Repeat 3 to 6 above to set the day and time to turn the alarm off.

The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this listheader

1. From the TIMERBLOCKS page header,

press or toselect ‘Alarm 1 (or 2)’

2. Press to show theParameter List

3. Press again to select‘Enable’

4. Press or toEnable = ‘On’

This enables the use ofAlarm Timer Blocks.

It can be used, forexample, to disablealarms during factory shutdown periods.

7. Press to select ‘OnTime’

8. Press or to setthe alarm on time

Page 205: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-11

12.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters

Table Number:

12.4.1.

This page allows you to set up Timer AlarmParameters

TIMER BLOCKS(Alarm 1 or 2 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default

AccessLevel

Enable RTC Alarm 1 Enable

Enables the timer alarm

OffOn

Off L3

On-Day Sets the day to turn thealarm on

NeverMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturdaySundayMon-Fri,Mon-SatSat-SunEvery Day

Never L3

On-Time Sets the time of day to turnthe alarm on

0:00:00 to23:59:59

0:00:00

L3

Off-Day Sets the day to turn thealarm off

NeverMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturdaySundayMon-Fri,Mon-SatSat-SunEvery Day

Never L3

Off-Time Sets the time of day to turnthe alarm off

0:00:00 to23:59:59

0:00:00

L3

Output Alarm 1 output. Off

On

Off L1

Page 206: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

12.6. TOTALISERS

There are four totalisers.. It is usual to run a totaliser automatically from the source which isto be totalised. Separate Run and Reset parameters are, therefore, provided which can bewired in configuration mode to the necessary sources. The following example, however,shows how a totaliser can be run from the operator interface.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

To Run a Totaliser

To Hold a Totaliser

The totaliser will begin to run.

Run Starts the totaliserReset Resets the totaliser

Note:When the totaliser is runningit can also be reset or runusing the Reset parameter.

Following a reset the totaliserwill be ready to run again fromzero.

6. Press to select‘Hold’

7. Press or tochange the value between‘Continue’ & ‘Hold’

Hold Stops thetotaliser

Continue

Allows thetotaliser torun from thepreviouslytotalisedvalue

1. From the TIMERBLOCKS page header,

press or toselect ‘Totaliser 1 (to 4)’

2. Press to show theParameter List

3. Press or toscroll to and highlight‘Run’

4. Press to select ‘Run

5. ’ Press or tochange the value to ‘Run’

8. Repeat 3 to 6 above to set the day and time to turn the alarm off.

The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this listheader

Page 207: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-13

12.6.1. Totaliser Parameters

Table Number:

12.5.1.

This page allows you to set up TotaliserParameters

TIMER BLOCKS(Totaliser1 (to 4)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default

AccessLevel

Reset Resets the totaliser NoYes

No L1

Run Runs the totaliser RunReset

Reset L1

Hold Holds the totaliser at itscurrent valueNote:The Run & Hold parametersare designed to be wired to(for example) digital inputs.Run must be ‘on’ and Holdmust be ‘off’ for the totaliserto operate.

HoldContinue

Hold L1

Total This shows the totalisedvalue

L1

Alarm Setpoint Sets the totalised value atwhich an alarm will occur

L3

Alarm Output This is a read only valuewhich indicates the alarmoutput On or Off.

The totalised value can be apositive number or anegative number.

If the number is positive thealarm occurs when

Total > + Alarm Setpoint

If the number is negative thealarm occurs when

Total > - Alarm Setpoint

OffOn

Off L1

Page 208: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller

12-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 209: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller User Values

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-1

13. CHAPTER 13 PATTERN GENERATOR, USER VALUESAND USER MESSAGES .......................................................... 2

13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR? ..........................................213.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator..............................................................213.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?.................................................................413.2.1. To Adjust User Values..............................................................................413.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES? ...........................................................513.3.1. To Inspect User Messages.........................................................................5

Page 210: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

User Values 2704 Controller

13-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

13. Chapter 13 Pattern Generator, User Valuesand User Messages

13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR?

The pattern generator allows groups of digital values to be selected from a single inputnumber. This number may be provided from the programmer, from BCD inputs or from auser defined source. An example of its application would be to allow fixed output patterns tobe applied to different segments in a programmer

The pattern generator consists of 16 patterns, and each pattern consists of up to 16 digitaloutputs. The pattern can be selected from the user interface as follows although it is muchmore likely to have been wired to another source such as a programmer user values.

13.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘PATTERN GENERATOR’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘Dig Group 1 (or 2)’

Page 211: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller User Values

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-3

= Off

æ = OnIn this example thenumber of digits in eachpattern row has beenconfigured to six.

8. Press to select the firstpattern - ‘Pattern 0’

9. Press or tochange to change the firstdigit in the pattern to On orOff

10. Press to select the nextdigit in the pattern

11. Repeat the above threesteps to set all digits inPattern 0

12. Repeat steps 10 to 13 to set up all 16 patterns in Dig Group 1.

Note:-The parameter ‘Current OP’ shows the current state of the pattern generator as it is beingrun.

This is the number of thepattern to set up.

5. Press to show theparameter list

6. Press again to select‘Pattern’

7. Press or tochange the pattern

Current selected output

Page 212: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

User Values 2704 Controller

13-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

13.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?

User Values are normally used as constants in an analogue or digital operation.The 2704 controller contains up to 12 user values which are in a single list under the pageheader ‘User Values’. The User Values page is only available if Analogue and LogicOperators have been enabled in configuration level. This is described in the EngineeringHandbook Part No. HA026933.

13.2.1. To Adjust User Values

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

[Units] If units have been selected in configuration level they will be displayed here.The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible

The value can be adjustedbetween high and lowlimits as set inconfiguration level.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘USER VALUES’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘User Val 1 (to12)’

3. Press to show theparameter list

4. Press or tochange the value

Page 213: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller User Values

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-5

13.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES?

A User Message takes the form of a pop window as shown below:-

This is a similar format to that which occurs, for example, when an alarm occurs. See alsoSection 7.5. This message, however, can be displayed when a particular event - defined bythe user - occurs. For example, a User Message can be displayed if it has been wired to adigital input to alert an operator to a particular event.User messages can only se set up in configuration level. They can, however, be inspected inLevel 1.

13.3.1. To Inspect User Messages

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Press ª+° to Ack

Usr 1

Usr 2

User defined TitleUser defined Text

Instruction

The Title is ‘Usr 1’ whichmay have beencustomised inconfiguration level to showa meaningful message.

Similarly, the Text is ‘Usr2’ which may also havebeen customised.

The parameters ‘ShowMsg’ and ‘Dismissed’ areintended to be read overdigital communications.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘USER MESSAGES’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Msg 1 (to 8)’

3. Press to show theparameter list

4. Press or tohighlight each parameterin turn

Page 214: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

User Values 2704 Controller

13-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 215: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Analogue Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-1

14. CHAPTER 14 ANALOGUE OPERATORS ....................... 214.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?............................................214.1.1. Analogue Operations.................................................................................314.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATOR PARAMETERS4

Page 216: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Analogue Operators 2704 Controller

14-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

14. Chapter 14 Analogue Operators

14.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?

Analogue Operators allow the controller to perform mathematical operations on two inputvalues. These values can be sourced from any available parameter including AnalogueValues, User Values and Digital Values. Each input value can be scaled using a multiplyingfactor or scalar as shown in Figure 14.1.

The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable limits of thecalculation are determined in Configuration level (see 2704 Engineering HandbookHA026933). In access level 3 you can change values of each of the scalars. In Access levels2 & 3, provided the Analogue Operators page has been promoted, the input values and theresult of the calculation can be read.

The Analogue Operators page is only available if Analogue and Logic Operators have beenenabled in configuration level. This is described in the 2704 Engineering Handbook.

Up to 24 separate operations can be performed and a separate page header is provided foreach one.

Figure 14-1: Analogue Operators

Output Value(result of calculation)

Analogue input 1

Analogue input 2

Analogue operatorSee 14.1.1.Input 1 Scalar

Input 2 Scalar

Page 217: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Analogue Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-3

14.1.1. Analogue OperationsThe following operations can be performed:

Off The selected analogue operator is turned off

Add The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2

Subtract The output result is the difference Input 1 and Input 2where Input 1 > Input 2

Multiply The output result is the multiplication of Input 1 and Input 2

Divide The output result is Input 1 divided by Input 2

Absolute Difference The output result is the absolute difference between Input 1 and Input2

Select Max The output result is the maximum of Input 1 and Input 2

Select Min The output result is the minimum of Input 1 and Input 2

Hot Swap Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is ‘good’. If input 1 is‘bad’ then input 2 value will appear at the output. An example of abad input occurs during a sensor break condition.

Sample and Hold Normally input 1 will be an analogue value and input B will be digital.

The output tracks input 1 when input 2 = 1 (Sample).

The output will remain at the current value when input 2 = 0 (Hold).

Input 2 can be an analogue value and must change from 0 to 100%to provide a sample and hold at the output.

Power The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value atinput 2. I.e. input 1input 2

Square Root The output result is the square root of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.

Log The output result is the logarithm (base 10) of Input 1. Input 2 has noeffect

Ln The output result is the logarithm (base n) of Input 1. Input 2 has noeffect

Exp The output result is the exponential of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect

10x The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 value. I.e.10input 1. Input 2 has no effect

Select Logic 1 Input 1 or input 2 is switched to the output depending upon the stateof

up to the logic input.

If logic input is true input 1 is switched through to the output.

Select Logic 32 If logic input is false input 2 is switched through to the output.

Page 218: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Analogue Operators 2704 Controller

14-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

14.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATORPARAMETERS

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

6. Press to highlight‘Input 1 Scalar’

7. Press again to select‘Input 1 Scalar’

8. Press or tochange the value

This scalar is used as amultiplying factor on input 1

This is a read only parameteravailable in Access Level 1(provided the page has beenpromoted to this level). Itdisplays the type ofcalculation which has beenconfigured.

The choices are:Off, Add, Subtract, Multiply,Divide, Absolute Difference,Select Max, Select Min, HotSwap, Sample Hold, SquareRoot, Log, Ln, Exp, 10x,Select Logic 1 to Select Logic32.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘ANALOGUE OPERS’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘An 1 (to 24)’

5. Press to show theparameter list

Page 219: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Analogue Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-5

11. Press to selectInput 1 Value

12. Press to selectInput 2 Value

13. Press to selectOutput Value

This is a read only value ofinput 1

This is a read only value ofthe result of thecalculation.

This is a read only value ofinput 2

[Units] If units have beenselected in configuration levelthey will be displayed here.

14. Press to selectStatus

The result of thecalculation is Good or Bad.

Eg. It is within high andlow limits set inconfiguration level.

9. Press to selectInput 2 Scalar

This scalar is used as amultiplying factor on input 2

10. Press or tochange the value

Page 220: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Analogue Operators 2704 Controller

14-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 221: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Logic Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 15-1

15. CHAPTER 15 LOGIC OPERATORS ................................ 215.1.1. Logic Operations.......................................................................................215.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERS .................................3

Page 222: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Logic Operators 2704 Controller

15-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

15. Chapter 15 Logic OperatorsLogic Operators allow the controller to perform logical calculations on two input values.These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values, UserValues and Digital Values.The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed, input value inversion and‘fallback’ value are determined in Configuration level (see Engineering HandbookHA026933). In levels 1 to 3 you can view the values of each input and read the result of thecalculation.The Logic Operators page is only available if Analogue and Logic Operators have beenenabled in configuration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook.

Up to 32 separate calculations can be performed and a separate page header is provided foreach one.

15.1.1. Logic Operations

The following calculations can be performed:

Off The selected logic operator is turned off

AND The output result is ON when both Input 1 and Input 2 are ON

OR The output result is ON when either Input 1 or Input 2 is ON

XOR Exclusive OR. The output result is true when one and only oneinput is ON. If both inputs are ON the output is OFF.

Latch The output is ON when input 1 turns ON. The output remains ONwhen input 1 turns OFF. The output is reset to OFF by turninginput 2 ON.

Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 = Input 2

Greater The output result is ON when Input 1 > Input 2

Less than The output result is ON when Input 1 < Input 2

Greater or Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 > Input 2

Less or Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 < Input 2

Figure 15-1: Logic Operators

Logic input 1

Logic input 2

Output Value(result of calculation)

Logic operatorSee 15.1.1.

Invert option

Invert option

Page 223: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Logic Operators

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 15-3

15.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERSDo This This Is The Display You

Should SeeAdditional Notes

This is a read only valueavailable in Access level 1(provided the page hasbeen promoted to thislevel).It displays the type ofcalculation which has beenconfigured.

The choices are:Off, AND, OR, XOR, Latch,Equal, Not Equal, Greater,Less Than, Great or Equal,Less or Equal.

This is a read only value,Off or On.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘LOGIC OPERS’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Logic 1 (to 32)’

5. Press to show theparameter list

6. Press to show ‘Input1 Value’

Page 224: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Logic Operators 2704 Controller

15-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

8. Press to selectOutput Value

This is a read only valueof the result of thecalculation,Off or On.

9. Press to selectStatus

The result of thecalculation is Good orBad.

An example of a badstatus may occur if asensor break condition isdetected.

The output will default to a‘fallback’ value previouslyset in configuration level.

This is described in theEngineering Handbook,Part No. HA026933.

7. Press to select Input2 Value

This is a read only value,Off or On.

Page 225: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Digital Communications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 16-1

16. CHAPTER 16 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS .................. 216.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS? ........................................216.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION.......316.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS..................................................4

Page 226: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Digital Communications 2704 Controller

16-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

16. Chapter 16 Digital Communications

16.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS?

Digital Communications (or ‘comms’ for short) allows the controller to communicate with aPC or a networked computer system. A choice of comms protocol is available and can beselected in configuration level. These are MODBUS (or JBUS), EIBisynch, and Profibus.

Comms modules can be fitted which use RS232, RS485 or RS422 Transmission Standards.A full description of these standards is given in the 2000 series Communications Handbook,part number HA026230.

Comms modules can be fitted into either or both of two positions referred to as the H slot andthe J slot which correspond to the rear terminal connections, see also section 2.4. Both slotpositions may be used at the same time. An example is, to allow a multi-drop connectionbetween a number of controllers and a computer running, say, a SCADA package on onecomms position, and a separate PC used for configuration purposes on the second commsposition. In this example an RS485 module may be fitted for the multi-drop/SCADArequirement and RS232 in the second position for the single PC/configuration requirement.

Note: When the controller is placed into Configuration Level it is taken ‘off line’ andplaced into a standby state. In this state it no longer monitors or controls the plant.

Page 227: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Digital Communications

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 16-3

16.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION

Parameters in the Comms page allow you to set up the Address and Resolution.The operation of the H and J Modules is the same.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

5. Press to show the listof comms parameters.

6. Press again to select‘Address’

7. Press or tochange the instrumentaddress

8. Press to selectfurther parameters

9. Press or tochange a parameter valuewhere applicable

Up to 254 addresses canbe set in level 1

Digital communicationsmodules may be fitted ineither one or bothpositions.

ModbusEIBisynchORProfibusEI Bisynch(f ordered)

Level 3Readonly

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘COMMS’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘H Module’

Choices are:-

FullInteger

Level 3

Page 228: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Digital Communications 2704 Controller

16-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

16.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS

Digital communications diagnostics is available under the Comms page header. Twoparameters are displayed. These show the number of times that the particular comms modulehas received a message. They are displayed as follows:

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

These are a read onlyparameters.

The H Rx and J Rxmessages incrementseach time a validmessage is received viathe H Comms Module or JComms modulerespectively.

The Timed Out messagesindicate a comms timeout

5. Press to show thediagnostic parameters

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘COMMS’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or toselect ‘Diagnostic’

Page 229: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-1

17. CHAPTER 17 STANDARD IO .......................................... 217.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO?......................................................................217.2. PV INPUT...................................................................................................317.2.1. To Scale the PV Input ...............................................................................317.2.2. Offset.........................................................................................................317.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter Time ....................................................517.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters .............................................................617.3. ANALOGUE INPUT .................................................................................717.3.1. To Scale the Analogue Input.....................................................................717.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters...................................................717.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS...................................817.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT...........................................817.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters..........................................................1017.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS.........................................1117.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters .........................................1117.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS.....................12

Page 230: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17. Chapter 17 Standard IO

17.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO?

Standard IO refers to the fixed Input/Output connections as listed in Table 17-1 below.Parameters such as input/output limits, filter times and scaling of the IO can be adjusted inthe Standard IO pages.

This chapter also describes User Scaling of the standard IO.The controller is calibrated for life against known reference standards during manufacture,but user scaling allows you to offset the ‘permanent’ factory calibration to either:-

1. Scale the controller to your reference standards2. Match the calibration of the controller to an individual transducer or sensor3. To compensate for known offsets in process measurements

These offsets can be made to parameters in the Standard IO pages.

(PV InputPage)

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedProcess Variable Input connected to terminals VH,VI, V+ and V-. This is, generally, the PV input for asingle loop controller.

(An InputPage)

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedAnalogue Input connected to terminals BA, BB andBC. This is the high level input from a remotesource.

(AA RelayPage)

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedRelay output connected to terminals AA, AB andAC. This relay may be used as an alarm relay. atime proportioning control output or valveraise/lower..

(Dig IO1Page)

to

(Dig IO7Page)

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixeddigital IO connected to terminals D1 to D7 and DC.

(DiagnosticPage)

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixeddigital Input connected to terminal D8 and DC.

Note:-Names shown in italics can be customised.

Table 17-1: Standard I/O

STANDARD IO

Page 231: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-3

17.2. PV INPUT

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Process Variable Input connected toterminals VH, VI, V+ and V-. This is the PV input for a single loop controller.

17.2.1. To Scale the PV InputScaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs only, eg linearised transducers, whereit is necessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from thetransducer. PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs.Figure 17-1 shows an example of input scaling. where an electrical input of 4-20mA requiresthe display to read 2.5 to 200.0 units.

Figure 17-1: Input Scaling (Standard IO)

17.2.2. Offset

Offset has the effect of moving the whole curve, shown in Figure 17-1,up or down about acentral point. The ‘Offset’ parameter is found in the STANDARD IO (PV Input) page asshown in the controller view in Section 17.2.3.

Electrical Loeg 4 mA

Electrical Input

DisplayReading

Display Hieg 200.0

Display Loeg 2.5

Electrical Hieg 20 mA

Page 232: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

To scale a linear PV Input proceed as follows:

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Set this value to thelowest level of the input,eg 4mA.The units displayed heremay be mV, V, mA orOhms depending on what

[Units] If units have been selected in configuration levelthey will be displayed here.The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible

The PV Input is connectedto terminals VH, V+, V-.

Set this value to thehighest level of the input ,eg 20mA.

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘STANDARD IO’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘PV Input’ (if necessary)

5. Press to show‘Electrical Lo’

6. Press again to select‘Electrical Lo’

7. Press or to adjustthe value

8. Press to select‘Electrical Hi’

9. Press or to adjustthe value

Page 233: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-5

17.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter TimeAn input filter provides damping of the input signal. This may be necessary to prevent theeffects of excessively noise on the PV input.The filter may be turned off or set up to 10minsIf the input is configured to accept process levels, eg 4-20mA, as in the above example, theparameter which follows ‘Eng Value Hi’ is ‘Filter Time’.

For thermocouple and RTD inputs the first parameter to be displayed is the Input Filter Time,since the input scaling parameters do not appear for specific linearised inputs.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentminimum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Lo input, eg2.50

Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentmaximum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Hi input, eg200.00

10. Press to select ‘EngValue Lo’

11. Press or to adjustthe value

12. Press to select ‘EngValue Hi’

13. Press or to adjustthe value

The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under the PVInput list header

1. From the previous display

press to select ‘FilterTime’

2. Press or to adjustthe Filter Time between Offand 10mins

Page 234: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters

Table Number:

17.2.3.

This page allows you to set up PV InputParameters

STANDARD IO(PV Input

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3. Only

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range for

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display linear

Eng Value Hi High display reading range inputs

Filter Time PV input filter time. !Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Emissivity Emissivity. Only appears ifthe PV input is configured asa pyrometer

Off to 1.00 L3

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the PV input

Input range R/O

PV Input Val

PV Input can be auser definedname.

The current value of the PVinput in engineering units.

Displayrange

R/O

Offset Transducer scaling offset.Only appears if the PV inputis configured for transducer

Displayrange

L3 R/O

CJC Temp CJC Temperature. Onlyappears if the PV input isconfigured for thermocouple

DisplayRange

R/O

PV In Status PV input status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh C SbreakCh A OutrangeCh C OutrangeCh A IP SatCh C IP SatCh A NotCalibCh C NotCalib

L3 R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value Displayrange

L3 R/O

Page 235: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-7

17.3. ANALOGUE INPUT

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Analogue Input connected to terminalsBA, BB and BC. This is the high level input from a remote source.

17.3.1. To Scale the Analogue InputThe procedure is the same as that described in section 17.2.1.

17.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters

Table Number:

17.3.2.

This page allows you to set up Analogue InputParameters

STANDARD IO(An Input

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Displayrange

L3

Eng Value Hi High display reading Displayrange

L3

Filter Time Analogue input filter time !Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Electrical Value The current electrical valueof the analogue input

Input range R/O

An Input Val

An Input can be auser definedname.

The current value of the AnInput in engineering units

Displayrange

R/O

Offset Transducer scaling offset.Only appears if the PV inputis configured for transducer

Displayrange

L3 R/O

An In Status Analogue input status Good

Bad æ

L3 R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value Displayrange

L3 R/O

Page 236: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS

Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Relay output connected to terminals AA,AB and AC. This relay may be used as an alarm relay. or a time proportioning controloutput.

17.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT

If the relay is used as a time proportioning control output this means that the relay will, bydefault, be fully off for 0% power demand, fully on for 100% power demand and equal on/offtimes at 50% power demand.As with input scaling you can change these limits to suit the process. It is important to note,however, that these limits are set to safe values for the process. For example, for a heatingprocess it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature. This can be achievedby applying an offset at 0% power demand which will maintain the relay on for a period oftime. Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process tooverheatThese offsets can be made to parameters in the ‘AA Relay’ pages. The above example isshown in Fig 17-2

Table 17-2: Fixed Relay Scaling

Electrical Loeg Relay on for

short period

Electrical Output. Inthis example theon/off ratio of theoutput relay

PID Demandsignal

Eng Value Hieg 100%

Eng Value Loeg 0%

Electrical Hieg Relay

permanently on

Page 237: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-9

To set up and scale the Fixed Relay Output proceed as follows

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

If the relay is wired to thePID output demandsignal, as shown in Figure17-2,.set this to a lowvalue, normally 0.

The AA Relay isconnected to terminalsAA,AB and AC

If the relay is wired to thePID output demandsignal, as shown in Figure17-2,.set this to a highvalue, normally 100.

This parameter applies totime proportioning outputsonly.

Auto = 0.05sec

8. Press to select‘Electrical Lo’

9. Press or to adjustthe value

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘STANDARD IO’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to scrollto the AA Relay Page

5. Press to show the AARelay parameter list

6. Press again to select‘Min Pulse Time’

7. Press or to choose‘Auto’ or a minimum on/offtime for the relay

10. Press to select‘Electrical Hi’

11. Press or to adjustthe value

Page 238: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters

Table Number:

17.5.1

This page allows you to set up the Fixed RelayParameters

STANDARD IO(AA Relay)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

The first five parameters only appear if the relay is configured for time proportion output

Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9

20sec L3

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Displayrange

L3

Eng Value Hi High display reading Displayrange

L3

AA Relay Value Status of the relay output -100 to 100 R/O.

(editableif notwired)

Set up this value so thatthe relay switches fully offcorresponding to theElectrical Low setting

Set up this value so thatthe relay switches fully oncorresponding to theElectrical High setting

The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under this listheader

12. Press to select ‘EngValue Lo’

13. Press or to adjustthe value

14. Press to select ‘EngValue Hi’

15. Press or to adjustthe value

Page 239: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Standard IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-11

17.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS

This page allows access to parameters which set up the fixed digital IO connected toterminals D1 to D7 and DC.The standard digital IO1 to 7 can either be input or output as set up in configuration level, seeEngineering handbook HA026933. The choices are:-

1. Digital Input IO configured as a digital input2. On/Off IO configured as a digital output3. Time Proportion IO configured as a control output4. Valve Lower IO configured to raise the output of a motor valve controller5. Valve Raise IO configured to lower the output of a motor valve controller

The parameters are accessed in the same way as the sections above. When the logic outputsare configured as time proportioning outputs, they can be scaled using the same procedure asthe fixed relay output, described in 17.5..

The logic IO parameters are listed in the following table:-

17.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters

Table Number:

17.6.1.

This page allows you to set up the Digital I/OParameters. The parameters which appeardepend upon the type of I/O configurated

STANDARD IO

(Dig IO1 to 7 Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

The first five parameters only appear if the digital IO channel is configured for timeproportioning output.

Min Pulse Time Minimum logic on or offtime.

Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9

20sec L3

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display L3

Eng Value Hi High display reading range L3

Dig IO1 Val If configured as an outputthis reads the desired outputvalue

If configured as an input thisreads the state of the digitalinput

-100 to 100

or

0 = On

not 0 = Off

L3

or

R/O

Electrical Value The current electrical valueof the output demand signal.

If configured as a digitalinput this value is not shown

0 to 100or0 = Onnot 0 = Off

R/O

Page 240: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Standard IO 2704 Controller

17-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

17.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS

This page allows you to inspect the status of Digital Input 8 or the IO Expander if fitted. It isa read only page for diagnostic purposes only. The parameters are shown in Table 17.7

Table Number:

17.7

This page allows you to inspect DigitalInput 8 or IO Expander status

STANDARD IO(Diagnostic Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Dig In8 Val Status of digital input 8 OffOn

R/O

Dig In E1 Val Status of IO expander input OffOn

R/O

Bad Channels A bad input or output will bedisplayed as æ and will occurif the I/O is either a short oropen circuit

toæææææææ

R/O

Page 241: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-1

18. CHAPTER 18 MODULE IO............................................... 218.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO?..........................................................................218.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION.................................................................318.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS .................................................................418.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission .........................................................518.3.2. Relay Output .............................................................................................618.3.3. Triac Output ..............................................................................................718.3.4. Triple Logic Output ..................................................................................818.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input ......................................................818.3.6. PV Input....................................................................................................918.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply.......................................................................1018.3.8. Transducer Power Supply .......................................................................1018.3.9. Potentiometer Input.................................................................................1118.3.10. DC Input................................................................................................1218.3.11. Dual PV Input .......................................................................................1318.4. MODULE SCALING...............................................................................1518.4.1. The PV Input...........................................................................................1518.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:- .........................................................................1618.4.3. Output modules .......................................................................................1818.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:- ...................................................................1918.4.5. Retransmission Output ............................................................................2018.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:- .......................................................2018.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input ......................................................21

Page 242: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18. Chapter 18 Module IO

18.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO?

Additional analogue and digital IO is provided by the plug in IO modules. These modulescan be fitted in any of five slots (see Section 2.4.2). The type and position of any modulesfitted in the controller is shown in the order code printed on the label on the side of thecontroller. This can be checked against the order code in Appendix A of this manual.Modules are available as single channel, two channel or three channel IO as listed below

Module OrderCode

Displayed As Number of Channels

Change over relay

2 pin relay

Dual relay

R4

R2

RR

Form C Relay

Form A Relay

Dual Relay

1

1

2

Triac

Dual triac

T2

TT

Triac

Dual Triac

1

2

DC control D4 DC Control 1

DC retransmission D6 DC Retrans 1

PV input PV PV Input 1

Triple logic input

Triple contact input

TL

TK

Tri-Logic IP

Tri-Contact IP

3

3

Triple logic output TP Tri-Logic OP 3

24V transmitter supply MS Transmitter PSU 1

5VdcTransducer powersupply

G3 Transducer PSU 1

10VdcTransducer powersupply

G5 Transducer PSU 1

Potentiometer input VU Pot Input 1

Analogue input module

(2604/2704 dc Input)

AM DC Input 1

Dual PV input

(Dual Probe Input)

DP Dual PV In 2

Table 18-1: I/O Modules

Parameters for the above modules, such as input/output limits, filter times and scaling of theIO, can be adjusted in the Module IO pages. The procedures are very similar to those coveredin Chapter 17 ‘STANDARD IO’.

Page 243: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-3

18.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION

The first page which appears under the heading Module IO shows the type of module fitted ineach slot position.

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

If a module is fitted in anymodule position, it’s type,as listed in Table 18-1, isdisplayed.

No Module is displayed ifthe slot is empty.

This is a read onlydisplay.

5. Press to show the listof modules.

6. Press again to selectthe module

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘Module IO’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘Idents’ (if necessary)

Page 244: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS

To view and alter parameters associated with each module:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

2. Press to show the listof parameters for theselected module

3. Press again to selectthe first parameter

4. Press again to scrollto a parameter which youwish to change

5. Press or tochange its value

The following tables showthe parameters availablefor different module types

If the channel is not used themessage ‘No Parameters’ isdisplayed

If a module is not fitted inthe selected position thesub header is notdisplayed

(A), (B), (C ) refer to theoutput channel of asingle, dual or triplemodule respectively

1. From the MODULE IOsub-header display press

or to choose therequired module

Page 245: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-5

18.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission

Table Number:18.3.1.

This page allows you to set up the parametersfor a DC Output module.

MODULE IO(Module 1(A))

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident DC Output DC Output R/O

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range L3.

See

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range ‘ToScale

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range Output

Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range Modules’

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output

Volts or mA R/O

Module 1 A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 1 A can be a userdefined name

0 - 100% R/O

This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Page 246: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.3.2. Relay Output

Table Number:

18.3.2.

This page allows you to set the parameters fora Relay Output module.

Changeover relay Ident Form C Relay

2 Pin Relay Ident Form A Relay

Dual Relay Ident Dual Relay

MODULE IO(Module 4(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Relay R/O

The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.

Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9

20sec L3

Only

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.

Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output

0.00 or 1.00 R/O

Module 4 A Val The current output value

Module 4 A can be a userdefined name

+ 100%

-ve valuesare shownbut not used

R/O

The changeover relay and 2 pin relay are single output modules. The parameters above aredisplayed under ‘channel’ (A) only.

Dual Relay has two outputs. The parameters above are displayed under Channel (A) andChannel (C ).

Page 247: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-7

18.3.3. Triac Output

Table Number:

18.3.3.

This page allows you to set the parameters fora Triac Output module.

Triac Ident Triac

Dual Triac Ident Dual Triac

MODULE IO(Module x(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Triac R/O

The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.

Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9

20sec L3

Only

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.

Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output

0.00 or 1.00 R/O

Module x A Val The current output value

Module x A can be a userdefined name

+ 100%

-ve valuesare shownbut not used

R/O

The triac output is a single output module. The parameters above are displayed under‘channel’ (A) only.

The dual triac has two outputs. The parameters above are displayed under Channel (A) andChannel (C ).

Page 248: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.3.4. Triple Logic Output

Table Number:

18.3.4.

This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Logic Output module.

MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Logic Output R/O

The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.

Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9

20sec L3

Only

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.

Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output

0.0 or 1.00 R/O

Module x A Val The current output value

Module x A can be a userdefined name

+ 99999

-ve valuesare shownbut not used

R/O

This module has three outputs. Each output is found under Module 1(A), (B) and (C ).

18.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input

Table Number:

18.3.5.

This page allows you to set the parameters fora Triple Logic Input module.

MODULE IO(Module x(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Logic Input R/O

Module x A Val The current output value

Module x A can be a userdefined name

0

1

R/O

This module has three inputs. Each input is found under Module 1(A), (B) and (C ).

Page 249: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-9

18.3.6. PV Input

Table Number:

18.3.7.

This page allows you to set the parameters fora PV Input module.

This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.

MODULE IO(Module 3(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident PV Input R/O

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured

See ‘ToScale

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display the PV

Eng Value Hi High display reading range Input’

Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Emissivity Emissivity

Pyrometer input only

Off to 1.00 L3

Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the input

Input rangeunits asconfigured

R/O

Module 3A (or 6A)Val

The current value inengineering units.

Module 3A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

Offset Transducer scale offset Displayrange

0 L3

Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh AOutRangeCh A IP SatCh A NotCalib

R/O

CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC

Thermocouple inputs only

R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor break value

Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured

R/O

This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Page 250: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply

Table Number:

18.3.9.

This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Transmitter Power Supply module.

MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Transmitter PSU R/O

Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 1A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.

18.3.8. Transducer Power Supply

Table Number:

18.3.9.

This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Transducer Power Supply module.

MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident Transmitter PSU R/O

Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 1A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Page 251: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-11

18.3.9. Potentiometer Input

Table Number:

18.3.9.

This page allows you to set the parameters fora Potentiometer Input module.

MODULE IO(Module x(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default

AccessLevel

Ident Pot Input R/O

Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0:10:00.0 L3

Eng Val Lo Engineering value low Display range L3

Eng Val Hi Engineering value high Display range L3

Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 1A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

Cal State Allows the potentiometer tobe calibrated. See section18.4.

Pot Low Pos

Pot High Pos

Idle L3

Module Status Module status OK

Initialising

Ch A Sbreak

Ch A OutRange

Ch A IP Sat

Ch A Not Calib

R/O

This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.

Page 252: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.3.10. DC Input

TableNumber:

18.3.10.

This page allows you to set the parameters for aDC Input module.

This module can only be fitted in slots 1, 3, 4 or 6.

MODULE IO(Module x(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Ident PV Input R/O

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured

See ‘ToScale

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display the PV

Eng Value Hi High display reading range Input’

Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Emissivity Emissivity

Pyrometer input only

Off to 1.00 L3

Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input

Input rangeunits asconfigured

R/O

Module 3A (or 6A)Val

The current value inengineering units.

Module 3A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

Offset Transducer scale offset Display range 0 L3

Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh AOutRangeCh A IP SatCh A Not Calib

R/O

CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC

Thermocouple inputs only

R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue

Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured

R/O

This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).

Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.

Page 253: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-13

18.3.11. Dual PV Input

The dual PV input module accepts two inputs - one from a high level source (channel A) andone from a low level source (channel C). The two inputs are not isolated from each other andhave an update rate of 5Hz. A typical application for the module is for a zirconia probe input.The module can also be configured for a single input when the update rate becomes 10Hz.

Table Number:

18.3.11.

This page allows you to set the parameters forChannel A of a Dual PV Input module.

This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.

MODULE IO(Module 3(A)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

This module has two inputs. Parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A) and ‘channel’ (C)

Channel A is the high level input, channel C is the low level input. This table shows Module3 (or 6)A parameters

Ident High Level Input R/O

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured

See

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display range ‘ToScale

Eng Value Hi High display reading Display range the PVInput’

Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input

Input range unitsas configured

R/O

Module 3A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 3A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits

Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh A OutRangeCh A IP SatCh A Not Calib

R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue

Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured

R/O

Page 254: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Table Number:

18.3.11.

This page allows you to set the parameters forChannel C of a Dual PV Input module.

This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.

MODULE IO(Module 3(C)

Page)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

This module has two inputs. Parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A) and ‘channel’ (C)

Channel A is the high level input, channel C is the low level input. This table shows Module3 (or 6)C parameters

Ident Low Level Input R/O

Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.

Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured

See

Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display range ‘ToScale

Eng Value Hi High display reading Display range the PVInput’

Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0

L3

Emissivity Emissivity

Pyrometer input only

Off to 1.00 L3

Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input

Input range unitsas configured

R/O

Module 3A Val The current value inengineering units.

Module 3A can be a userdefined name.

R/O

Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits

CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC

Thermocouple inputs only

R/O

SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue

Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured

R/O

Channel Name Channel name DefaultText

R/O

Page 255: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-15

18.4. MODULE SCALING

The IO modules are scaled as already described in Chapter 17 for the fixed inputs andoutputs. The procedures are repeated below:-

18.4.1. The PV InputScaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs, eg linearised transducers, where it isnecessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer.PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs.Figure 18-1 shows an example of input scaling. where an electrical input of 4-20mA requiresthe display to read 2.5 to 200.0 units.

Figure 18-1: Input Scaling (Modules)

Electrical Loeg 4 mA

Electrical Input

DisplayReading

Engineeringvalueeg 200.0

Engineeringvalueeg 2.5

Electrical Hieg 20 mA

Page 256: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Set this value to thelowest level of the input,eg 4mA.

Set this value to thehighest level of the input ,eg 20mA.

5. Press to show the listof parameters.

6. Press or toscroll to ‘Electrical Lo’

7. Press to select theElectrical Lo .

8. Press or tochange the value

9. Press to select the‘Electrical Hi’ .

10. Press or tochange the value

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘Module IO’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or tochoose the slot in whichthe PV Input module isfitted

Page 257: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-17

11. Press to select theEng Val Lo .

12. Press or tochange the value

13. Press to select theEng Val Hi .

14. Press or tochange the value

[Units] If units have been selected in configuration level they will be displayed here.

The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible

Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentminimum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Lo input, eg 2

Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentmaximum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Hi input, eg200.00

Page 258: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.4.3. Output modulesIf the output module is DC or if it is a relay, triac or logic used as time proportioning control,it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit theoperation of the output value. This is shown in Figure 18-2 applied to a relay output or anytime proportioning output..

By default, the relay will be fully off for 0% power demand, fully on for 100% power demandand equal on/off times at 50% power demand. You can change these limits to suit theprocess. It is important to note, however, that these limits are set to safe values for theprocess. For example, for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum levelof temperature. This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0% power demand which willmaintain the relay on for a period of time. Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum onperiod does not cause the process to overheatThese offsets can be made to parameters in the relevant Module IO pages.

If the output is DC the electrical low and electrical high parameters are analogue values andcan be set as in the example given for DC Output Retransmission, section 18.4.3.

Figure 18-2: Time Proportioning Relay, Triac or Logic Output

Electrical Loeg RelayPermanently off

Í

Electrical Output. Inthis example theon/off ratio of theoutput relay

PID Demandsignal

Eng Value Hieg 100%

Eng Value Loeg 0%

Electrical Hieg Relaypermanently on

Î

Page 259: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-19

18.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Set this to a low value,normally 0.

1. From the MODULE IO sub-

header display, Press

or to choose the slot inwhich the Output module isfitted

2. Press to show the listof parameters.

3. Press or toscroll to ‘Electrical Lo’

4. Press to select theElectrical Lo .

Set up this value so thatthe relay (triac or logic)switches fully offcorresponding to theElectrical Low setting

Set this to a high value,normally 100.

Set up this value so thatthe relay (triac or logic)switches fully oncorresponding to theElectrical High setting

5. Press to select theElectrical Hi .

6. Press or tochange the value

7. Press to select theEng Val Lo .

8. Press or tochange the value

9. Press to select theEng Val Hi .

10. Press or tochange the value

Page 260: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

18.4.5. Retransmission OutputThe retransmission output can be scaled so that the output value corresponds to range of thesignal to be retransmitted.Figure 18-3 shows an example where the retransmitted signal is PV or SP where an electricaloutput of 4-20mA represents 20.0 to 200.0 units.

Figure 18-3: Scaling a Retransmission Output

18.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:-

This is identical to that described in Section 18.4.1.1.

Electrical Loeg 4 mA

Electrical Output

DisplayReading

Display Hieg 200.0

Display Loeg 20.0

Electrical Hieg 20 mA

Page 261: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Module IO

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-21

18.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input

The value of the potentiometer input is read by the parameter ‘Module xA Val’, where x is thenumber of the slot in which the Pot input module is fitted. This parameter can be scaled toread the value of the potentiometer input or as a percentage as required.

To calibrate the potentiometer input:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

This will set the minimumreading when the potposition is at minimum

7. Press to scroll to CalState

8. Press or toselect ‘Pot Low Pos’

9. Adjust the potentiometerto minimum position

10. To confirm, press or

to select ‘Go’.

(You can also select‘Abort’ at this point)

1. Access the Pot Inputparameter list from theMODULE IO (Module xA)page header

2. Press or to scrollto ‘Eng Val Lo

3. ’ Press to select ‘EngVal Lo

4. Press or to changeits value

5. Press to select ‘EngVal Hi’

6. Press or tochange its value

This will set the maximumreading when the potposition is at maximum

To calibrate follow theinstructions on thedisplay.

When the controller iscalibrating the message‘Doing Fine Cal’appears.

When the controller hasfinished the message‘Passed’ appears.

Press or to‘Accept’. After 0.5 secthe display will revert to‘Idle’ completing theprocedure.

To Calibrate the Potentiometer Minimum Position

Page 262: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Module IO 2704 Controller

18-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

11. Press or toselect ‘Pot High Pos’

12. Adjust the potentiometerto maximum position

13. To confirm, press or

to select ‘Go’.(You can also select‘Abort’ at this point)

To calibrate follow theinstructions on thedisplay.

When the controller iscalibrating the message‘Doing Fine Cal’appears.

When the controller hasfinished the message‘Passed’ appears.

Press or to‘Accept’. After 0.5 secthe display will revert to‘Idle’ completing theprocedure.

You can also ‘Abort’ atthis stage.

To Calibrate the Potentiometer Maximum Position

11. The parameter ‘Module 1x Val’ now indicate the potentiometer position between 0 and1000 (ohms), as set in this example.

Note:-When this parameter is highlighted, the units are displayed in the upper right of the displaybanner.

The units and resolution will have been set in configuration level.

Page 263: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-1

19. CHAPTER 19 TRANSDUCER SCALING ......................... 219.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING?...................................................219.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION ..........................................................................319.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer .......................................419.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION.................................................................519.3.1. To Calibrate a Load Cell...........................................................................719.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION ............................................................819.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference.............................919.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION ..............................................................1119.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare Feature.................................................................1119.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS ........................................1319.6.1. Parameter Notes ......................................................................................14

Page 264: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

19. Chapter 19 Transducer Scaling

19.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING?

Transducer scaling is a software function block which provides a method of offsetting thecalibration of the controller input when compared to a known input source. Transducerscaling is often performed as a routine operation on a machine to take out system errors. Inthe case of a load cell, for example, it may be necessary to zero the scale when a load isremoved.

Transducer scaling can be applied to any input or derived input, i.e. the PV Input, AnalogueInput or Modules 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In practice, however, it is unlikely that transducer scalingwould be required on every input and so the 2704 controller includes three transducercalibration function blocks. These can be wired in configuration level to any three of theabove inputs.

Four types of calibration are explained in this chapter:-

1. Shunt Calibration

2. Load Cell Calibration

3. Comparison Calibration

4. Auto-tare

Page 265: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-3

19.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION

Shunt calibration is so called since it refers to switching a calibration resistor across one armof the four wire measurement bridge in a strain gauge transducer. It also requires the use of aTransducer Power Supply module wired as shown in Figure 2-13.

The strain gauge transducer is calibrated as follows:1. Remove any load from the transducer to establish a zero reference.2. Enter ‘Scale Low’ and ‘Scale High’ values which are normally set at 0% and 80% of the

span of the transducer.3. Start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’, or a digital

input wired to this parameter.

The controller will automatically perform the following sequence:1. Disconnect the shunt resistor2. Calculate the low point calibration value by continuously averaging two lots of 50

measurements of the input until stable readings are obtained3. Connect the shunt resistor4. Calculate the high point calibration value by averaging two lots of 50 measurements of

the input

Figure 19-1: Strain Gauge Calibration

AB

D

C

Transducer power supply

Strain gauge

Controller underCalibration

Page 266: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

19.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge TransducerThe controller must have been configured for Cal Type = Shunt, and the transducerconnected as shown in Figure 2-13 using the ‘Transducer Power Supply’. Then:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

The choices are :Txdcr 1Txdcr 2Txdcr 3

This text can be userdefined

5. Press to show theparameter list

6. Press again to selectEnable Cal

7. Press or to On

This parameter remains‘On’ once it has been set.It requires to be switched‘Off’ manually.

It may be wired to anexternal digital inputsource such as a keyswitch

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘TXDCR SCALING’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘Txdcr 1’ (or 2 or 3)

It is first necessary to enable calibration as follows:-

Page 267: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-5

Note:-It is possible to start the calibration procedure before the system has settled at a stable value.The controller continuously takes blocks of 50 samples. When the average value betweentwo consecutive blocks is within the ‘Threshold Value’ the controller will then calibrate.The Threshold Value defaults to 0.5 but can be adjusted in configuration level. If thereadings are not stable within this period the controller will abort the calibration.

In this example a value of8000 is chosen whichmay represent 80% of the0 -10,000psi range of apressure transducer.

10. Press to scroll toScale High

11. Press or toenter the high endcalibration value

12. Press to scroll toStart Pnt 1 Cal

13. Press or toenter On

- Tip: To backscroll hold down and press

This will normally be zero8. Press as many times

as necessary to scroll toScale Low

9. Press or toenter the low endcalibration value

The controller automatically performs the procedure described in Section 19-2. During thistime the Cal Active parameter will change to On. When this parameter value changes back toOff the calibration is complete.

The Shunt State parameter will also change during the procedure to show when it is beingconnected (On = connected, Off = disconnected).

This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.

Set the strain gauge bridge to its ‘zeroed’ condition

Page 268: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

19.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION

A load cell with V, mV or mA output may be connected to the PV Input, Analogue Input orModules 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 supplied as analogue inputs. The wiring connections are shown inSections 2.3.3, 2.3.4, and 2.4.2 respectively.

The load cell is calibrated as follows:1. Remove any load and start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter ‘Start

Pnt1 Cal’, or a digital input wired to this parameter. The controller will calculate the lowcalibration point

2. Place a reference weight on the load cell and turn on the high point calibration parameter‘Start Pnt2 Cal’, or a digital input wired to this parameter. The controller will thencalculate the high calibration point.

Note:-If ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’ = ‘On’, ‘Start Pnt2 Cal’ cannot be turned to ‘On’.If ‘Start Pnt2 Cal’ = ‘On’, ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’ cannot be turned to ‘On’.Either must complete before the other can be set to ‘On’.

Figure 19-2: Load Cell Calibration

Load Cell

Reference Weight

Controller underCalibration

Page 269: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-7

19.3.1. To Calibrate a Load CellThe controller must have been configured for Cal Type = Load Cell, and the transducerconnected as shown in Chapter 2. Then:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

Note:-‘Scale High’ is the high calibration point and ‘Scale Low’ is the low calibration point. Theseshould be set to the range over which calibration is required. ‘Threshold Value’ applies as inthe previous section.

Enable calibration as described in steps 1-7 of section 19.2.1.

Then set the load cell to its ‘zeroed’ condition

3. Press to scroll toStart Pnt2 Cal

4. Press or to On

1. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Pnt1 Cal’

2. Press or to ‘On’

It can be configured to beinitiated from a digitalinput and wired, forexample, to an externalswitch. If this has beenconfigured this parametercan be turned on fromthis source.

This parameter can beconfigured so that it isactivated from a digitalinput and wired, forexample, to an externalswitch. If this has beenconfigured this parametercan be turned on fromthis source.

During the time taken forthe controller to calculatethe low point calibrationvalue, the Cal Activeparameter will be On.

When the Calibration low procedure is complete, place the reference load on the loadcell

Page 270: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

19.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION

Comparison calibration is most appropriate when calibrating the controller against a secondreference instrument.

In this case the process calibration points are not entered ahead of performing the calibration.The input may be set to any value and, when the system is stable, a reading is taken from thereference measurement device and entered into the controller. The controller stores both thisnew target value and the actual reading taken from its input.The process is repeated at a different value, with the controller storing both the new targetvalue and the reading taken from its input.

Figure 19-3: Comparison Calibration

ReferenceMeasurement

Device

Load

Controller underCalibration

ReferenceTransducer

MeasurementTransducer

Page 271: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-9

19.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

10. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Adjust Value’

11. Press or to enterthe value indicated on thereference instrument

12. Press to confirm or

to cancel asinstructed

8. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Pnt1 Cal’

9. Press or to ‘On’

The confirm messagedoes not appear unless‘Adjust Value’ is changed.

If the displayed value isacceptable change itmomentarily then back tothe value to step to thenext stage.

On confirm the currentinput value is stored as‘Input Low’ and the valueentered by the user isstored in the ‘Scale Low’parameter.

This parameter can beconfigured to be activatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.

Enable calibration as described in steps 1-7 of section 19.2.1.

Then allow the process to settle at the low calibration point

Page 272: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

Allow the Process to settle at the high calibration point

13. Press to ‘Start Pnt2Cal’

14. Press or to ‘On’

This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.

It is possible to perform either low or high points in isolation, or to calibrate both pointsconsecutively as described above.

15. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Adjust Value’

16. Press or toenter the value indicatedon the referenceinstrument

17. Press to confirm or

to cancel asinstructed

The confirm messagedoes not appear unless‘Adjust Value’ is changed.

If the displayed value isacceptable change itmomentarily then back tothe value to step to thenext stage.

On confirm the currentinput value is stored as‘Input High’ and the valueentered by the user isstored in the ‘Scale High’parameter.

Page 273: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-11

19.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION

The auto-tare function is used, for example, when it is required to weigh the contents of acontainer but not the container itself.The procedure is to place the empty container on the weigh bridge and ‘zero’ the controller.Since it is likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto-tarefeature is always available in the controller at access level 1.

19.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare FeatureFirstly, access the transducer scaling parameters as follows:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

The choices are :Txdcr 1Txdcr 2Txdcr 3

This can be user defined text

5. Press to show theparameter list

6. Press again to selectEnable Cal

7. Press or to On(if necessary)

This parameter remains‘On’ once it has been set.It requires to be switched‘Off’ manually.It may be wired to anexternal digital input sourcesuch as a key switch

1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu

2. Press or to select‘TXDCR SCALING’

3. Press to show Sub-headers

4. Press or to select‘Txdcr 1’ (or 2 or 3)

Page 274: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

Then follow the auto-tare calibration as follows:-

Do This This Is The Display YouShould See

Additional Notes

The effect of auto-tare is to introduce a DC bias to the measurement, as shown in Figure 19-1below.

Figure 19-4: Effect of Auto-Tare

Note:- A Tare calibration will change the values of ‘Scale High’ and ‘Scale Low’.

1. Set the equipment at the normal tare point, eg place the empty container on theweigh bridge

3. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Tare’

4. Press or to ‘On’

1. Press to ‘Tare Value’

2. Press or to enterthe required value

This will normally be zero.

When once set it will onlybe necessary to accessthis parameter again if anew tare value isrequired.

This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.

Input Low Input HighInput at auto-tare point

New Scale High

Scale High

Tare value

PV at tare point

New Scale Low

Scale Low

Tareoffset

Tareoffset

Tareoffset

Original Scaling

New Scaling

Page 275: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Transducer Scaling

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-13

19.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS

Table Number:18.3.1.

This page shows the Transducer Scalingparameters.

TXDCR SCALING(Txdcr 1)

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Enable Cal (1) Enable calibration OffOn

Off L3

Start Tare (2) Start auto-tare calibration OffOn

Off L1

Start Pnt1 Cal (3) Start the calibration at point1, normally the low point

OffOn

Off L1

Start Pnt2 Cal (4) Start the calibration at point2, normally the low point

OffOn

Off L1

Clear Cal (5) Clear previous calibrationvalues

Off

On

Off L3

Tare Value Sets the value that thecontroller will read after anauto-tare calibration

Displayrange

L3

Input Low Sets the scaling input lowpoint

L3

Input High Sets the scaling input highpoint

L3

Scale Low Sets the scaling output lowpoint

L3

Scale High Sets the scaling output highpoint

L3

Threshold Val (6) The allowed differencebetween two consecutiveaverages during calibration

0 - 99.999mins

L3

Shunt State (7) Indicates that the shuntresistor is connected or not

Off

On

L3 R/O

Cal Active Indicates calibration inprogress

Off

On

L3 R/O

Scaled Value Output from the scalingblock. Used for diagnosticpurposes only

R/O

Adjust Value Sets the value read by thereference source incomparison calibration only

L1

OP Status Output status based oninput status and scaled PV

Good

Bad

R/O

Page 276: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller

19-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00

19.6.1. Parameter Notes

1. Enable Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.

When enabled the transducer parameters may be altered as describedin the previous sections. When the parameter has been turned On itwill remain on until turned off manually even if the controller ispowered cycled.

2. Start Tare This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.

3. Start Pnt1 Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.It starts the calibration procedure for:1. Shunt Calibration2. The low point for Load Cell Calibration3. The low point for Comparison Calibration

4. Start Pnt2 Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.It starts the calibration procedure for:1. The high point for Load Cell Calibration2. The high point for Comparison Calibration

5. Clear Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.When enabled the input will reset to default values. A new calibrationwill overwrite the previous calibration values if Clear Cal is notenabled between calibrations.

6. Threshold Val The input needs to settle within a range which has been set inconfiguration level. The threshold value sets the required settling timefor shunt, load cell and auto-tare calibration.

7. Shunt This parameter is an output from the function block which can bewired to a transducer scale module to close the shunt circuit andintroduce the calibration resistor. It may be used in copy and pastewiring.

Page 277: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Diagnostics

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 20-1

20. CHAPTER 20 DIAGNOSTICS .......................................... 220.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS? .....................................................................220.1.1. Diagnostics parameters .............................................................................2

Page 278: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Diagnostics 2704 Controller

20-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

20. Chapter 20 Diagnostics

20.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS?

Diagnostics are displayed in Access Level 3 only and provide information on the internalstate of the controller. They are intended for use in advanced fault finding situations. Up toeight error messages can be listed and each error message displays a message showing thestate of the controller. The error messages are shown in Note 1.The diagnostic parameters are listed below:-

20.1.1. Diagnostics parameters

Table Number:

20.1.1

This page allows you to inspect diagnosticinformation

DIAGNOSTICS

Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel

Error Count Number of errors recorded R/O

Error 1 R/O

Error 2 R/O

Error 3 R/O

Error 4 Historical errors where 1 is See R/O

Error 5 the most recent Note 1 R/O

Error 6 R/O

Error 7 R/O

Error 8 R/O

CPU % Free A measure of the loading onthe CPU

R/O

Con Task Ticks A measure of the activity of R/O

UI Task 1 Ticks the algorithm R/O

UI Task 2 Ticks R/O

Power FF Power feedback. Measuresthe supply voltage to thecontroller

R/O

Power Failures A count of the number ofpower failures

R/O

Page 279: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Diagnostics

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 20-3

Note 1.Possible error messages:-

OK

Bad Ident

Bad Fact Cal

Module Changed

DFC1 Error, DFC2 Error, DFC3 Error

Module N/A

CBC Comms Error

Cal Store Error

CBC Cal Error

Bad PV Input

Bad Mod3 Input, Bad Mod4 Input, Bad Mod6 Input,

Bad An Input

Bad NVOL Check

Bad X Board

Bad Res Ident

Bad SPI SemRel

Bad CW EETrans

Bad Prog Data

Bad Prog Csum

SegPool Over

SPI Locked

SPI Queue Full

HighP Lockout

Pro Mem Full

Invalid Seg

Program Full

Invalid Prog

Bad Logic 1 to Bad Logic 7

CPU Add Err

Calc CRC Err

Bad Cal Restore

Bad Cust Lin

Bad Instruct

Bad Slot Instr

DMA Addr Err

Reserved Int

Undefined Int

SPC Init Err

Page 280: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Diagnostics 2704 Controller

20-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Page 281: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Appendix A

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 A-1

A. APPENDIX A ORDER CODE............................................. 2A. HARDWARE CODE .....................................................................................2B. QUICK START CODE..................................................................................3

Page 282: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Appendix A 2704 Controller

A-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

A. Appendix A Order Code

A. HARDWARE CODE

The 2704 controller has a modular hardware construction, which accepts up to six plug-inmodules and two communications modules. Eight digital IO and a relay form part of thefixed hardware build.

1 Controller Type2704 Standard2704f Profibus

2 Supply VoltageVH 85-264VacVL 20-29Vac/dc

3 Loops/ProgramsFirst Digit1_ _ One Loop2_ _ Two Loop3_ _ Three LoopSecond Digit_XX No Programs_2_ 20 Programs (1)

_5_ 50 ProgramsThird Digit_ XX No Programs_ _1 1 Profile_ _2 2 Profile_ _3 3 Profile

4Application

XX StandardZC Zirconia

5 - 9 I/O Slots 1 3 4 5 6XX None FittedR4 Change Over RelayR2 2 Pin RelayRR Dual RelayT2 TriacTT Dual TriacD4 DC ControlD6 DC RetransmissionPV PV Input(slots 3 & 6

only)TL Triple Logic InputTK Triple Contact InputTP Triple Logic OutputMS 24Vdc Transmitter

PSUVU Potentiometer InputG3 5Vdc transducer PSUG5 10Vdc transducer

PSUAM Analogue Input

module (not slot 5)DP Dual DC input (4)

(slots 3 & 6 only)

15 Config ToolsXX NoneIT iTools

10 MemoryModule

XX Not Fitted

13Manual

ENG EnglishFRA FrenchGER GermanNED DutchSPA SpainSWE SwedenITA Italian

11 - 12 Comms HJ

First Slot onlyPB ProfibusBoth SlotsXX None FittedA2 EIA-232Y2 2 wire EIA-485F2 4 wire EIA-485

14 Toolkit FunctionsXX StandardU1 16 An & 16 DigU2 24 An & 32 Dig

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Hardware Code Example

2704/VH/323/XX/RR/PV/D4/TP/PV/XX/A2/XX/ENG/U1/IT

Three loop controller with capability to store 20 three profile programs. Supply voltage 85 - 264 Vac.Modules: 2 x PV input, 1 x Dual relay, 1 x DC control, 1 x Triple logic output, EIA-232 Comms.16 analogue and 32 digital operations and iTools supplied with controller.

Hardware notes:2. Programmer includes 8 digital

operations3. Toolkit 1 includes 16 analogue,

16 digital, event groups & 4 uservalues

4. Toolkit 2 includes Toolkit 1 plusextra 8 analogue, 16 digitaloperations and 8 user values

5. Dual analogue input suitable forcarbon probes

Page 283: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Appendix A

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 A-3

B. QUICK START CODE

The controller supplied in accordance with the hardware code on the previous page requiresto be configured. Configuration is carried out using iTools. Alternatively, for simpleapplications the controller may be supplied pre-configured using the following code:-

1 - 3 Loop functionXXXX NoneS___ Standard PIDC___ CascadeR___ RatioO___ Override (7)

_PID PID control_ONF On/Off control_PIF PID/OnOff control_VP1 VP w/o feedback_VP2 VP with feedback

4 - 6 Process inputs(Input type)

X NoneJ J ThermocoupleK K ThermocoupleT T ThermocoupleL L ThermocoupleN N ThermocoupleR R ThermocoupleS S ThermocoupleB B ThermocoupleP P ThermocoupleC C ThermocoupleZ RTD/PT100A 4-20mA linearY 0-20mA linearV 0-10Vdc linearW 0-5Vdc linearG 1-5Vdc linearCustom (Replace C)Q Custom curveD D ThermocoupleE E Thermocouple1 Ni/Ni18%Mo2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh3 W/W26%Re(Eng)4 W/W26%Re(Hos)5 W5%Re/W26%Re(Eng)6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Hos)7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%Rh8 Exergen K80 IR Pyro

7 Analogue inputXXX NoneP2_ PV Loop 2P3_ PV Loop 3S1_ SP Loop 1S2_ SP Loop 2S3_ SP Loop 3A1_ Aux PV Loop 1A2_ Aux PV Loop 2A3_ Aux PV Loop 3L1_ Ratio lead PV Loop

1L2_ Ratio lead PV Loop

2L3_ Ratio lead PV Loop

3Input rangeSelect third digit from table 1

Table 1A 4-20mA linearY 0-20mA linearV 0-10Vdc linearW 0-5Vdc linearG 1-5Vdc linear

8 - 12 Slot functionLoop numberXXX Unconfigured1__ Loop No 12__ Loop No 23__ Loop No 3Single relay or triac_HX Heat_CX CoolDual relay or triac_HC PID Heat & Cool_VH VP Heat_AA FSH & FSH_AB FSH & FSL_AC DH & DL_AD FSH & DH_AE FSL & DLHHX Heat O/P lps 1 & 2P12 Prog events 1 & 2P34 Prog events 3 & 4P56 Prog events 5 & 6P78 Prog events 7 & 8Triple logic output_HX Ch1 Heat_CX Ch1 Cool_HC Ch1 Heat, Ch2 CoolHHX Heat O/P lps 1 & 2HHH Heat O/P lps 1,2 & 3DC outputs_H_ PID Heat_C_ PID Cool_T_ PV Retransmission_S_ SP RetransmissionFor output range select third digitfrom table 1Precision PV input_PV PV input Module_PA Aux PV Input (8)

_PL Ratio lead inputAnalogue Input *_R_ SetpointAux & lead PV inputs *_L_ Ratio lead input_B_ Aux PV input* For input range select third digitfrom table 1Potentiometer input_VF VP Feedback_RS Remote SP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Page 284: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Appendix A 2704 Controller

A-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00

Notes

1. Loop 1 PV defaults to main input on microboard. Loop 2 and 3 PV inputs must be fittedin I/O slots 3 or 6 or be assigned to the analogue input.

2. This alarm configuration refers to loop alarms only. One selection per loop is allowed.Additional alarms are available for the user to configure.

3. Thermocouple and RTD inputs assume sensor min and max values with no decimal point.4. Linear inputs are ranged 0-100%, no decimal point.5. Temperature inputs will be C unless ordered by USA where F will be supplied.6. Remote setpoints assume loop min & max ranges.7. VP1 or VP2 not available with override function.8. For cascade and override inputs only.

Quick start code example:

SVP1/SPID/SPID/K/Z/A/S1A/1VH/2PV/2HV/3HC/3PV

This code configures the hardware specified on page A2 to be:

Loop1: Valve position control, Type K input, Ch1 VP output in slot 1, 4-20mA remotesetpoint input.Loop 2: PID control, RTD input in slot 3, 0-10Vdc Ch1 output in slot 4.Loop 3: PID control, 4-20mA input in slot 6, Logic Ch1/Ch2 output in slot 5.

Page 285: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information

Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-1

B. APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION ........... 2B.1. SAFETY .......................................................................................................2B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibility....................................................................2B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR ...........................................................................2B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautions ............................................................2B.2.2. Cleaning .....................................................................................................2B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ......................................3B.3.1. Safety Symbols...........................................................................................3B.3.2. Personnel ....................................................................................................3B.3.3. Enclosure of live parts ................................................................................3B.3.4. Isolation......................................................................................................3B.3.5. Wiring ........................................................................................................4B.3.6. Power Isolation...........................................................................................4B.3.7. Earth leakage current..................................................................................4B.3.8. Overcurrent protection ...............................................................................5B.3.9. Voltage rating.............................................................................................5B.3.10. Conductive pollution ................................................................................5B.3.11. Over-temperature protection.....................................................................6B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shield .............................................6B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC ...................................6B.4.1. Routing of wires .........................................................................................6

Page 286: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller

B-2 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

B. Appendix B Safety and EMC InformationThis controller is manufactured in the UK by Eurotherm Controls Ltd.

Please read this section carefully before installing the controller

This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when itwill meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC. Use in otherapplications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this handbook may impairthe safety or EMC protection provided by the controller. It is the responsibility of theinstaller to ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation.

B.1. SAFETY

This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by93/68/EEC, by the application of the safety standard EN 61010.

B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibilityThis controller conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive89/336/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC, by the application of a Technical Construction File.This instrument satisfies the general requirements for heavy/light industrial andresidential/commercial environments as described by EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-2. Formore information on product compliance refer to the Technical Construction File.

B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR

This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier for repair.

Caution: Charged capacitors

Before removing an instrument from its sleeve, disconnect the supply and wait at least twominutes to allow capacitors to discharge. Failure to observe this precaution will exposecapacitors that may be charged with hazardous voltages. In any case, avoid touching theexposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve.

B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautionsWhen the controller is removed from its sleeve, some of the exposed electronic componentsare vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller.To avoid this, before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground.

B.2.2. CleaningDo not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible.Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to cleanother exterior surfaces of the product.

Page 287: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information

Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-3

B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

B.3.1. Safety SymbolsVarious symbols are used on the instrument, they have the following meaning:

Caution, (refer to the accompanying documents)

Functional earth (ground) terminal!

The functional earth connection is not required for safety purposes but to ground RFI filters.

B.3.2. PersonnelInstallation must only be carried out by qualified personnel.

B.3.3. Enclosure of live partsTo prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live, the controllermust be installed in an enclosure.

B.3.4. IsolationThe fixed digital I/O and analogue input are not isolated. The PV Input and all plug inmodules are fully isolated. This is shown in Figure B-1.

The Analogue Input is a self biased differential input suitable for either grounded or floatingtransducers of low output impedance generating signal in the range of +/-10V or +/-20mA(with a burden resistor of 100 Ohms across + and - terminals).This input is neither isolated from the instrument ground (which can be earthed via fixed I/Oports) nor isolated from the instrument earth terminal, therefore, under no circumstancesshould mains potentials be applied to any of its inputs.In order for the Input to operate safely the common voltage at the inputs measured withrespect to instrument ground should not exceed +/-120Vdc or acrms. For actively enhancedcommon mode rejection (i.e. operation within the spec.) this voltage should be limited to +/-40Vdc.Floating transducers will automatically be biased to +2.5V with respect to instrument groundupon connection.

Note: All the other I/Os are fully isolated from the instrument ground and eachother.

Page 288: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller

B-4 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

Figure B-1: Analogue Input and Fixed Digital I/O Equivalent Circuit

B.3.5. WiringIt is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in thishandbook. Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input orother low level inputs and outputs. Only use copper conductors for connections (exceptthermocouple inputs) and ensure that the wiring of installations comply with all local wiringregulations. For example in the in the UK use the latest version of the IEE wiringregulations, (BS7671). In the USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods.

B.3.6. Power IsolationThe installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. This device shouldbe in close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as thedisconnecting device for the instrument.

B.3.7. Earth leakage currentDue to RFI Filtering there is an earth leakage current of less than 0.5mA. This may affect thedesign of an installation of multiple controllers protected by Residual Current Device, (RCD)or Ground Fault Detector, (GFD) type circuit breakers.

AnalogueInput

220K

220K

2.5V

100R FuseResistor

2M* BleedResistor

N L

Screen ComInstrument Ground

Digital IO

Digital Input

ControlVoltage

CommonVoltage

+

-

Page 289: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information

Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-5

B.3.8. Overcurrent protectionTo protect the internal PCB tracking within the controller against excess currents, the ACpower supply to the controller and power outputs must be wired through the fuse or circuitbreaker specified in the technical specification.

B.3.9. Voltage ratingThe maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must notexceed 264Vac:

• line or neutral to any other connection;

• relay or triac output to logic, dc or sensor connections;

• any connection to ground.

The controller should not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection.Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 264Vac with respect to ground and theproduct would not be safe.

Voltage transients across the power supply connections, and between the power supply andground, must not exceed 2.5kV. Where occasional voltage transients over 2.5kV areexpected or measured, the power installation to both the instrument supply and load circuitsshould include a transient limiting device.

These units will typically include gas discharge tubes and metal oxide varistors that limit andcontrol voltage transients on the supply line due to lightning strikes or inductive loadswitching. Devices are available in a range of energy ratings and should be selected to suitconditions at the installation.

B.3.10. Conductive pollutionElectrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller ismounted. For example, carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution. To secure asuitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit an air filter to the air intake ofthe cabinet. Where condensation is likely, for example at low temperatures, include athermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.

Page 290: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller

B-6 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

B.3.11. Over-temperature protectionWhen designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part ofthe system should fail. In temperature control applications the primary danger is that theheating will remain constantly on. Apart from spoiling the product, this could damage anyprocess machinery being controlled, or even cause a fire.

Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include:

• the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process;

• thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit;

• the controller failing with its heating output constantly on;

• an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition;

• the controller setpoint set too high.

Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend fitting a separate over-temperatureprotection unit, with an independent temperature sensor, which will isolate the heatingcircuit.

Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failureconditions.

B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shieldIn some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while thecontroller is still powered up. Under these conditions, as additional protection againstelectric shock, we recommend that the shield of the temperature sensor is grounded. Do notrely on grounding through the framework of the machine.

B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC

To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions arenecessary as follows:

• For general guidance refer to EMC Installation Guide, HA025464.

• When using relay or triac outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable forsuppressing the emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load. Fortypical applications we recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612.

B.4.1. Routing of wiresTo minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the wiring for low voltage dc and particularly thesensor input should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impracticalto do this, use shielded cables with the shield grounded at both ends.

Page 291: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-1

C. APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.................... 2C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS..........................................2C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE........................................................3C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE..........................................................3C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT ..................................................................................4C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE................................................................4C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O........................................................................5C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES ...................................................................5C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES...............................................................5C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES .........................................................5C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU...............................................................................5C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU.................................................................................6C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT....................................................................6C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS............................................................6C.14. ALARMS ...................................................................................................6C.15. USER MESSAGES ...................................................................................6C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................6C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER .................................................................7C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS......................................................................7C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION.................................................................7C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS...............................8C.20.1. mV Input...................................................................................................8C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input ..............................................................9C.20.3. High Level Input.....................................................................................10C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type .......................................................................11C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type........................................................................13

Page 292: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

C. Appendix C Technical SpecificationAll figures quoted at 0 to 50oC unless otherwise stated.

C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS

Sample rate 9Hz (110msec.)Input filtering OFF to 999.9 seconds of filter time constant (f.t.c.). Default setting is

0.4 seconds unless stated otherwiseUser calibration Both the user calibration and a transducer scaling can be applied.Sensor break a.c. sensor break on each input (i.e. fast responding and no dc errors

with high impedance sources).Thermocoupletypes

Most linearisations including K,J,T,R,B,S,N,L,PII,C,D,E withlinearisation error < ±0.2°C

General Resolution (noise free) is quoted as a typical figure with f.t.c. set to thedefault value = 0.4 second.Resolution generally improves by a factor of two with everyquadrupling of f.t.c.Calibration is quoted as offset error + percentage error of absolutereading at ambient temperature of 25OCDrift is quoted as extra offset and absolute reading errors per degree ofambient change from 25OC.

Page 293: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-3

C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE

Allocation(isolated)

One standard and up to two additional PV input modules can be fittedin I/O slots 3 and 6

mV input Two ranges: ±40mV & ±80mV, used for thermocouple, linear mVsource or 0 - 20mA with 2.49*Calibration: ±(1.5µV + 0.05% of reading), Resolution: 0.5µV for40mV range & 1µV for 80mV rangeDrift: <±(0.05µV + 0.003% of absolute reading) per °CInput impedance: >100M*, Leakage: < 1nA

0 - 2V input -1.4V to +2V, used for zirconiaCalibration: ±(0.5mV + 0.05% of reading)Resolution: 60µVDrift: < ±(0.05mV + 0.003% of reading) per °CInput impedance: >100M*, Leakage: < 1nA

0 - 10V input -3V to +10V, used for voltage inputCalibration: ±(0.5mV + 0.1% of reading)Resolution: 180µVDrift: <±(0.1mV + 0.01% of reading) per °CInput impedance: 0.66M*

Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms (-200°C to +850°C), 3 matched wires - up to 22* ineach lead without errors.Calibration: ±(0.1°C + 0.04% of reading in °C)Resolution: 0.02°CDrift: < ±(0.006°C + 0.002% of absolute reading in °C) per °CBulb current: 0.2mA.

Thermocouple Internal compensation: CJC rejection ratio >40:1 typical.CJ Temperature calibration error at 25OC: <± 0.5°C0°C, 45°C and 50°C external compensation available.

Zirconia probes Most probes supported. Continuous monitoring of probe impedance(100Ω to 100KΩ)

C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE

General The same specification as for the Precision PV Input module applieswith the exception of the following:Module offers two sensor/transmitter inputs, which share the samenegative input terminal.One low level (mV, 0-20mA, thermocouple, Pt100) and one high level(0-2Vdc, 0-10Vdc) can be connected

Isolation The two inputs are isolated from the rest of the instrument but notfrom each other

Sample rate (eachinput)

4.5Hz (220msec)

Input filtering Default setting is 0.8 seconds

Page 294: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT

No of inputs One fixed (Not isolated)Can be used with either floating or ground referenced transducers oflow impedance.

Input range -10V to +10V linear or 0 -20 mA with burden resistor of 100*.Calibration: ±(1.5mV + 0.1% of reading)Resolution: 0.9mVDrift: < ±(0.1mV + 0.006% of reading) per °CInput Impedance: 0.46MΩ (floating input), 0.23MΩ (groundreferenced input)

Isolation Not isolated from standard digital I/O . Differential type input withcommon mode range of + 42Vdc (the average voltage of the twoinputs with respect to ‘Screen’ or ‘Common’ terminals should bewithin +42Vdc.CMRR : >110dB at 50/60Hz, >80dB at DC

Functions Process variable, remote setpoint, power limit, feedforward, etc.

C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE

Allocation Up to 4 analogue input modules can be fitted in I/O slots 1,3,4 & 6mV input 100mV range - used for thermocouple, linear mV source, or 0-20mA

with 2.49Ω external burden resistor.Calibration: + 10µV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 6µVDrift: < + 0.2µV + 0.004% of reading per OCInput impedance: >10MΩ, Leakage: <10nA

0 - 2Vdc input -0.2V to +2.0V range - used for zirconia.Calibration: + 2mV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 30µVDrift: < + 0.1mV + 0.004% of reading per OCInput impedance: >10MΩ, Leakage: <20nA

0 - 10Vdc input -3V to +10.0V range - used for voltage input.Calibration: + 2mV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 200µVDrift: < + 0.1mV + 0.02% of reading per OCInput impedance: >69KΩ

Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms (-200°C to +850°C), 3 matched wires - up to 22* ineach lead without errors.Calibration: ±(0.4°C + 0.15% of reading in °C)Resolution: 0.08°CDrift: < ±(0.015°C + 0.005% of reading in °C) per °CBulb current: 0.3mA.

Thermocouple Internal compensation: CJC rejection ratio >25:1 typical.CJ Temperature calibration error at 25OC: <± 2°C0°C, 45°C and 50°C external compensation available.

Page 295: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-5

C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O

Allocationnot isolated

1 digital input standard and 7 I/O which can be configured as inputs oroutputs plus 1 changeover relay

Digital inputs Voltage level : input active < 2Vdc, inactive >4VdcContact closure : input active <100ohms, inactive >28kohms

Digital outputs Open collector, 24Vdc at 40mA drive capability, requires externalsupply

Changeover relay Contact rating 2A at 264Vac resistiveFunctions Refer to Chapter 17Operations 1,000,000 operations with addition of external snubber

C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES

Module type Triple contact input, Triple logic inputAllocation Can be fitted into slots 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6Contact closure Active <100ohms, inactive >28kohmsLogic inputs Current sinking : active 10.8Vdc to 30Vdc at 2.5mA

inactive -3 to 5Vdc at <-0.4mAFunctions Refer to Chapter 18

C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES

Module types Single relay, dual relay, single triac, dual triac, triple logic module(isolated)

Allocation Can be fitted into slot 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (max. 3 triac modules perinstrument)

Relay rating 2A, 264Vac resistiveLogic drive 12Vdc at 8mATriac rating 0.75A, 264Vac resistiveFunctions Refer to Chapter 18

C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES

Module types 1 channel DC control, 1 channel DC retransmission (5 max.)Allocation(isolated)

Can be fitted into slot 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6

Range 0-20mA, 0-10VdcResolution 1 part in 10,000 (2,000-noise free) 0.5% accurate for retransmission

1 part in 10,000 2.5% accurate for controlFunctions Refer to Chapter 18

C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU

Allocation Can be fitted into slots 1, 3 ,4 ,5 or 6 (isolated)Transmitter 24Vdc at 20mA

Page 296: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU

Bridge voltage Software selectable 5 or 10VdcBridge resistance 300Ω to 15KΩInternal shuntresistor

30.1KΩ at 0.25%, used for calibration of 350Ω bridge

C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT

Potentiometerresistance

330Ω to 15KΩ, excitation of 0.5 volts

C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

Allocation 2 modules fitted in slots H & J (isolated)Modbus RS232, 2 wire or 4 wire RS485, max baud 19.2KB in H module &

9.6KB in J moduleProfibus-DP High speed, RS485, 1.5Mbaud

C.14. ALARMS

No of Alarms Input alarms (2), loop alarms (2) User alarms (8)Alarm types Full scale, deviation, rate of change, sensor break plus application

specificModes Latching or non-latching, blocking, time delayParameters Refer to Chapter 7

C.15. USER MESSAGES

No of messages Maximum 50, triggered by operator or alarm or used for customparameter names

Format Up to 16 characters

C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS

No of loops One, two or threeModes On/off, PID, motorised valve with or without feedbackOptions Cascade, ratio, override or feed forwardCooling algorithms Linear, water, oil or fanPID sets 3 per loop (Cascade loop includes master and slave parameters)Manual mode Bumpless transfer or forced manual output, manual tracking availableSetpoint rate limit Display units per second, minute or hour

Page 297: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-7

C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER

No of programs A maximum of 50 programs assignable over 500 segments for a timeto target programmer and 400 segments for a ramp rate programmer.A program can consist of up to 3 variables. Programs can be givenuser defined 16 character names

Event outputs Up to 16, can be assigned individually to segments or called as part ofan event group

C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Application blocks 32 digital operations24 Analogue calculations

Timers 4, On Pulse, Off delay, one shot and min-OnTotalisers 4, trigger level & reset inputReal time clock Day of week and timePattern generators 16 x 16, 2 off

C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION

Display range 5 digits including up to 3 decimal placesSupply 85-264Vac, 20Watts (max)Operating ambient 0 - 50°C and 5 to 95% RH non condensingStorage temp -10 to +70°CPanel sealing IP54Dimensions 96H x 96W x 150D (mm)EMC standards EN50081-1 & EN50082-2 generic standards - suitable for domestic,

commercial and light industrial as well as heavy industrialenvironments

Safety standards Meets EN61010 installation category II, pollution degree 2Atmospheres Not suitable for use above 2000m or in explosive or corrosive

atmospheres

Page 298: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS

This section shows graphically the effects of adding all contributions of different errors foreach input type and range. The errors are a combination of:Calibration accuracy, Drift with ambient temperature, Linearity error, Leakage

C.20.1. mV InputTwo ranges:working range +40mVfull linear range +60mVnoise (resolution) 1uV - OFF, 0.5uV - 0.4sec, 0.25uV - 1.6sec

working range +80mVfull linear range +105mVnoise (resolution) 2uV - OFF, 1uV - 0.4sec, 0.5uV - 1.6sec

Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (1.5uV + 0.05% of |reading|)

Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.05uV + 0.003% of |reading|) per oC

Linearity error< +0.002% of span (i.e. <1uV, <2uV)

Leakage< +1nA (typically +200pA)

Figure C-1: Error Graph - mV Input

| Error | [uV]

Input[mV]

+40-40 +80-80

+ 105 mV

+ 60 mV

20

40

80

3

Maximumerror at 25oC

Worst case

Typicalcase.

Max. errorat 0 - 50 oC

Page 299: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-9

C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input0 - 2V Input type

Range:working range -1.4V to +2Vfull linear range -1.8V to +2.4Vnoise (resolution) 100uV - OFF, 50uV - 0.4sec, 35uV - 1.6sec

Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (0.5mV + 0.05% of |reading|)

Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.05mV + 0.003% of |reading|) per oC

Linearity error< + 0.01% of span (i.e. + 200uV)

Input Impedance & Leakage

>100MΩ < 1nA

Figure C-2: Error Graph - 0 - 2V Input

Worst case

Typicalcase.

Max. errorsat 0 - 50oC

| Error | [mV]

Input[V]

+1-1.4 +2-1.8

Maximum error at 25oC

1

2

3

0.5

4

Page 300: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

C.20.3. High Level Input0 - 10V Input type

Range:working range -3V to +10V

full linear range - 5V to +14Vnoise (resolution) 300uV - OFF, 150uV - 0.4sec, 100uV - 1.6sec

Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (0.5mV + 0.1% of |reading|)

Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.01mV + 0.006% of |reading|) per oC

Linearity error< +0.02% of span (i.e. + 2mV)

Input Impedance0.66 M*

Figure C-3: Error Graph - 0 - 10V Input

| Error | [mV]

Input[V]

+5-3 +10-5

Maximum error at

Worstcase

Typicalcase

Max. errorsat 0 - 50 oC

10

20

30

5

+12

40

Page 301: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-11

C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type

Resistance measurement specification in Ohms:Range

0 to 400 Ω with up to 22 Ω in each connecting lead

Noise (resolution)

80 mΩ - 0.4sec, 40mΩ - 1.6sec

Calibration accuracy limits @ 25OC< + (35mΩ @110Ω + 0.03% of |reading - 110Ω |)

Drift with ambient temperature+ (0.002% of |reading|) per oC

Linearity error

< +15 mΩ

Pt-100 measurement specification in oC:Range

-200 oC to +850 oC

Noise (resolution)0.02 oC - 0.4sec, 0.01 oC - 1.6sec

Calibration accuracy limit @ 25OC< + (0.1 oC + 0.03% of |reading in oC |)

Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.0055 oC + 0.002% of |reading in oC |) per oC of ambient change

Linearity + Linearisation error< + 55 omC (i.e. 50 omC + 5 omC )

Page 302: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

Figure C-4: Error Graph - RTD Input

Input[oC]

| Error | [oC]

400200 600-200

The actualmaximum error atambient 25oC

0.1

0.2

0.3

800

0.4

0

Specified limitof max. error atambient 25 oC

0.5

0.6

0.7 Specified limitof max. errorsat 0 to 50oC

The actual andtypical errorsat 0 to 50oC

Page 303: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

2704 Controller Technical Specification

Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-13

C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type

Internal CJT sensing specCalibration error @ 25 oC (including temp. difference between top and bottom screws)

< + 0.5 oC

Total CJT error< + (0.5 oC + 0.012 oC per 1 oC of ambient change)

( i.e. CJC Rejection for measured temperatures above 0 oC is > 80 : 1 )

Noise (resolution)0.01 oC

Figure C-5: Overall CJT Error at Different Ambient Temperatures

Ambient Temperature

| CJT Error |

0 25 50 75

1

Page 304: INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1 MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Technical Specification 2704 Controller

C-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00

Rua Alfredo Pujol, 1010 - Santana - São Paulo - SP.

SOLITON CONTROLES INDUSTRIAIS LTDA

Tel:11 - 6950-1834 / Fax: 11 - 6979-8980 - e-mail: [email protected]

www.soliton.com.br - e-mail: [email protected]ções sobre programação